Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 170

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY

Division (03) Concrete

ODAC

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 03: CONCRETE

1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC

Foreword
The internationally recognized framework known as Masterformat released by the Construction
Specifications Institute (CSI) has been adopted in order to organize the sorting and numbering in the new
edition of the specifications in a manner that insures the easy flow and exchange of information among
specialists and the community of the building industry at large. The new edition involves 12 main
divisions. These divisions are:
Division 01:

General Requirements

Division 02:

Site work

Division 03:

Concrete

Division 04:

Masonry

Division 05:

Metals

Division 06:

Wood and Plastics

Division 07:

Thermal and Moisture Protection

Division 08:

Doors and Windows

Division 09:

Finishes

Division 14:

Conveying Systems

Division 15:

Mechanical

Division 16:

Electrical

Each Division comprises a number of related Sections. For example: Division 08 includes eight sections.
They are:
08100

Doors and Frames

08200

Wooden and Plastic Doors

08300

Special Doors

08400

Entrances and Storefronts

08500

Metal Windows

08600

Wooden and Plastic Windows

08700

Hardware

08800

Glazing

Further, each Section incorporates seven Parts as follows:


Part 1:

General: This is mainly concerned with the references, quality control, submittals, programs,
and maintenance.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Part 2:

ODAC

Products: This gives a breakdown of material used in addition to their properties and place of
installation.

Part 3:

Execution: The most significant items in this Part are the execution and installation of the
works, field quality control, as well as cleaning and protection methods.

Part 4:

Methods of Measurement: This indicates the measurement units and the measuring methods
that shall be used for the Bill of Quantity.

Part 5:

Basis of Payment: This indicates the work that shall be completed for each item of the Bill of
Quantity. It also indicates the ancillary works to be included in the unit price rate.

Part 6:

Annex: Tables and Figures: Those relevant to the individual Section.

3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC

DIVISION 03
CONCRETE

4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC

INDEX
Division 01: General Requirements
Division 02: Sitework
Division 03: Concrete
03100

Concrete Formwork

03200

Concrete Reinforcement

03300

Cast-in-Place Concrete

03400

Precast Concrete

Division 04: Masonry


Division 05: Metals
Division 06: Wood & Plastics
Division 07: Thermal & Moisture Protection
Division 08: Doors & Windows
Division 09: Finishes
Division 14: Conveying Systems
Division 15: Mechanical
Division 16: Electrical

5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC

6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H42

H42

ODAC
PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL CLADDING/ FEATURES

PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL CLADDING/ FEATURES


To be read in conjunction with General Requirements.
TYPES OF CLADDING/ FEATURES

110
-

PRECAST CONCRETE PANELS Type EW2


Support structure: insitu concrete frame with dense blockwork infill panels.
Panel type: Homogeneous concrete.
Panel finish: Machine polished finish.
- Matching sample: Agreed with panel manufacturer.
- Profile: Smooth.
Thermal insulation: none.
Fixing: via stainless steel support system to manufacturers design.
Panel joints: Square edged with double sealant beads
Accessories/ Features/ Incorporated components: Provide drips to cills and
copings.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

210
-

DESIGN
Cladding: Complete detailed design.
Standard: To BS 8297.
Related works: Coordinate in detail design.

212
-

DESIGN PROPOSALS
Submission of alternative proposals: Preliminary design drawings indicate intent.
Other reasonable proposals will be considered.

215
-

INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED
Submit the following cladding particulars:
- Typical plan, section and elevation drawings at suitable scales.
- Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including flashings at head cills and
openings, movement joints and support system.
- Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with
specification of proposed incorporated products and finishes.
- Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance with
specification of proposed cladding.
- Proposals for connections to and support from the support structure/
background.
- Proposals for additional support structure/ background to that shown on
preliminary design drawings.
- Schedule of builders work, special provisions and special attendance by
others.
- Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan will be
prepared.
- Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and programme.
- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.
- Areas of non-compliance with specification.
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H42

ODAC
PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL CLADDING/ FEATURES

216
-

INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN


Submit the following cladding particulars:
- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from cladding to the support
structure.
- Proposed fixing details and systems relevant to structural design and
construction with methods of adjustment and tolerances.
- Labelled samples, that represent the range of variation in panel finish, for
approval of appearance.
- A schedule of fabrication tolerances/ size tolerances.
- A detailed testing, fabrication and installation programme in compliance with
construction programme.

218

INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF


MANUFACTURE OF CLADDING PANELS
Submit the following cladding particulars:
- Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.
- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with all design/ performance
requirements.
- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.
- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.
- Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of all
products.

222
-

FABRICATION SAMPLES
General: During detailed design work, submit samples of panel finish.
- Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.

224
-

MOCK-UP
General: Construct during detailed design work. Satisfy purpose and obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding. Retain undisturbed until completion of
cladding installation.
DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

232
-

234
-

INTEGRITY OF CLADDING
Requirement: Determine sizes and thickness of panels, sizes, number and
location of fixings and handling fixings, incorporation of accessories and
components to ensure cladding installation and panels will resist factored dead,
imposed and design live loads and accommodate deflections, shrinkage, creep,
handling and thermal movements without damage.
Wind loads: Calculate to BS 8297 Annex A appropriate to location and exposure
and taking account of existing and known future adjacent structures.
Impact loads: Visible surfaces of cladding to meet the requirements of BS 8297
clause 12.2.5.
WEATHER AND IMPACT RESISTANCE
Requirement:
- Cavity environment: Cavity to be free draining and ventilated.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H42

ODAC
PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL CLADDING/ FEATURES

- Ingress of moisture: No water to reach inner leaf face.


244
-

INITIAL SURFACE ABSORPTION


Testing: To BS 1881-208.
- Maximum values for each sample:
10 minute test: 0.50 ml/m.s.
1 hour test: 0.20 ml/m.s.

270
-

DIMENSIONAL COORDINATION
Detailing cladding: Comply with the requirements for accuracy in manufacture
and erection, and accommodate deviations in support structure.
Fixings/ Fasteners: Select to give sufficient three dimensional adjustment.
Proposals to achieve required tolerances: Submit.

MAKING CONCRETE
310
-

CONCRETE MIXES GENERALLY


Production of concrete: To BS 8500 and BS EN 206-1.
Chloride ion content of mix constituents: Not to exceed 0.4% of weight of cement.
Admixtures containing calcium chloride: Not allowed.
Sampling rate for compressive strength testing: Not less than one sample for
each day of use.

330
-

MIXES FOR VISIBLE FACES


Constituent materials and mix design: To remain constant for each finish type.
Panel colour and appearance: To be consistent for each finish type.
Aggregates: To be of consistent colour, free of deleterious materials that cause
popping and staining.
- Origin: Single source for each finish type having sufficient quantity for whole
contract.

340
-

RECORDS FOR EACH MIX TYPE


Requirements: Correlate and maintain records for:
- Mix designs: Composition including admixtures.
- Batching: Relate batch identification numbers to precast unit identification
numbers and test samples.
- Slump and other tests at casting yard.
- Testing authority test reports including cube identification numbers.

350
-

CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTING AUTHORITY


Testing: Carried out by the precast concrete panel manufacturer.
MANUFACTURE

420
-

MANUFACTURING ACCURACY
Standard: To BS 8297, table 11 and to allow compliance with clause 630.

430
-

FIXINGS
Materials generally: Nonferrous metal.
- Stainless steel: Austenitic in accordance with BS 8297, clause 4.3.3.1.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H42

ODAC
PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL CLADDING/ FEATURES

- Allowable alternative: Galvanized steel when located away from external faces
or edges.
Lifting devices: Mild steel permitted when mortar cover will provide the same
protection required for reinforcement in the panel.
Bimetallic corrosion and staining: Prevent by appropriate selection and use of
materials.

435
-

LIFTING POINTS
Device types: In accordance with BS 8297, clause 10.2.

440
-

REINFORCEMENT
Carbon steel reinforcement: To BS 4449, BS 4482 and BS 4483 as appropriate.
- Cutting and bending: To BS 8666.
Stainless steel reinforcement: To BS 6744.
- Designation (grade): 1,4301 (304).
- Cutting and bending: To BS 8666.
Galvanized reinforcement: Galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 after cutting, chromate
treated.
Condition at time of placement: Clean, free of corrosive pitting, loose materials
and substances that adversely affect reinforcement, concrete, or bond between
the two.
Fixing: Accurate and secure.
- Method: Wire tying, approved steel clips or tack welding if permitted.
- Concrete cover: Maintain free of all tying wire or clips.

450
-

PLACING REINFORCEMENT
Method statement: Submit.
Cover spacers: Not permitted on visible surfaces.

460
-

CONSISTENCY OF PRODUCTION
Production methods: To remain consistent for each matching type of finish.
- Finish appearance: To remain within the range of variation indicated by
samples submitted.
Changes to production methods: If variations are proposed for panels of same
finish, submit evidence that there will be no difference in appearance. Obtain
approval.

470
-

PANELS WITH NATURAL STONE FACINGS


Casting method: Face down.
Method of attaching facings: To BS 8297, clause 8.2.
Joints between stone slabs: Weathertight.

480
-

CASTING AND CURING


Placement of concrete: Thoroughly compact.
Immature panels: Avoid movement, vibration, overloading, physical shock, rapid
cooling and thermal shock.
Protection from weather: Do not expose panels to direct sunlight and drying
winds until at least 5 days after casting.
Delivery to site: Not until at least 14 days after casting.

4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H42

ODAC
PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL CLADDING/ FEATURES

490
-

QUALITY OF FINISHES
Appearance standard: As established by samples/ control panels.

500
-

PRODUCTION CONTROL PANELS


First production panel: Submit for inspection.
Approved panels: Retain for use as appearance control standard.
- Identification and storage: Clearly label and retain safely at factory.
- Delivery to site: Last of type.

510
-

INSPECTION
Give notice: When completed units are ready to be inspected at factory.

520
-

RECORDS
Records for each type of unit: Maintain details including:
- Unique identification number.
- Correlation with records of mixes, including batch numbers.
- Date of each stage of manufacture.
- Dates and results of all tests, checks and inspections.
- Dimensions related to specified levels of accuracy.
- Specific location in finished work.
- Damage and making good.
- Any other pertinent data, e.g. if unit is a production control unit.
Availability of records for inspection: On request.

ERECTION/ FIXING/ JOINTING


610
-

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED BY MANUFACTURER


Information: Provide clear and comprehensive instructions and ensure that they
are understood by the site operatives.

630
-

ACCURACY OF ERECTION
Supporting structure: Before commencing installation of precast panels, carry out
survey sufficient to verify that required accuracy of erection can be achieved.
- Give notice: If the structure will not allow the required accuracy or security of
erection.
Joint centres: Set out to ensure consistent joint widths.
Joint width: Within the length of any joint, including those interrupted by tranverse
joints, to vary by not more than 5mm (max 25% of designed joint width).
- Variations: Evenly distributed with no sudden changes.
- General: Within recommendations of joint sealant of baffle manufacturer.
In-line edges in elevation: Deviation across transverse joint to vary by not more
than 3mm (max 15% of designed joint width).
Flat faces of adjacent panels: Offset in plan or section across any joint to vary by
not more than 5mm (max 25% of designed joint width).
Finished appearance: Notwithstanding tolerances stated above and in clause
420, panels must be square, regular, true to line, level and plane with a
satisfactory fit at junctions.

640

FINAL FIXING
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H42

ODAC
PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL CLADDING/ FEATURES

Approval of appearance: Obtain for each elevation prior to tightening fasteners,


filling bed joints and dowel sockets or sealing joints.
Threaded fasteners: Tighten to torque figures recommended by manufacturer.
- Restraint fixings permitting lateral movement: Do not overtighten.
Filling for dowel bars and recessed lifting devices: Well tamped fairly dry 1:4
cement:sand or suitable epoxy or polyester mix.

650
-

MORTAR BEDDING TO PANELS ON SUPPORT STRUCTURE


Condition of surfaces: Clean.
Cavity adjoining bedding: Free of mortar.
Bed joint: Fully filled with dry 1:3 cement:sand mix. Well compacted.

652
-

CEMENT:LIME:SAND MORTAR JOINTING TO NATURAL STONE FACINGS


General: As section Z21.
Mix: Cement:lime:sand 1:1:5-6.
Preparation: Wet stones thoroughly.
Laying: Fully fill joints.

660
-

SEALANT JOINTS
Sealant Silicone.
- Location: All panel joints.
- Class to BS EN ISO 11600: F 25LM .
- Colour: Black.
- Application: As section Z22.

670
-

OPEN DRAINED JOINTS


Rear seals: Airtight and watertight.
Baffles and flashings: Securely installed.

6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

03 - Concrete
Section

03100 - Concrete Formwork

Part 1:

General

1 01

Summary

This chapter covers the design and construction of formwork and shores in accordance with the present
specifications and the indications given on the drawings.
The Contractor will provide all labor, materials, equipment, testing, quality control, quality assurance,
services and transportation required to complete all formwork.
Formwork shall be deemed to cover all surfaces required for containing concrete including stiffening,
bracing and tying and all props, shores and other supports to prevent over-stress of completed parts of
the structure.
Formwork with its necessary supports and braces shall be designed to safely support all vertical and
lateral forces that might be evident including the pressure of placing and vibrating of the concrete. The
design of formwork should also encompass their facile erection, unconstrained removal without damaging
the in-placed concrete, and efficient reuse.
Vertical and lateral forces must be carried to the ground or by in-place structure that has attained
adequate strength by the formwork system.
Formwork shall be constructed and maintained so to ensure that after removal of formwork, the finished
concrete members shall have true surfaces, free of offset waviness and will conform accurately to
shapes, dimensions, lines elevation and position with the tolerances for reinforced concrete buildings
specifications.

1 01 01

1 01 04

Section includes
01.0

Structural Concrete Formwork

02.0

Architectural Concrete Formwork

03.0

Permanent Formwork

Related Sections
02500 Paving and Surfacing
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
03400 Precast Concrete
04200 Unit Masonry

1 02

References

The latest revision of the publications listed below or a part of the specifications, unless otherwise
specified. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only

1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

1 02 01

Applicable Standards

1 02 01 03

International Standards

1 02 01 04

USA Standards

1 02 01 04 02

American Concrete Institute (ACI)


ACI 318

Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

ACI 303

Guide to Cast-in place Architectural Concrete Practice.

ACI 301: 96

Standard Specification for Structural Concrete.

ACI 347R: 94 Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

1 02 01 05

European Standards
ENV 206: 92 Concrete - Performance, Production, Placing and Compliance Criteria

1 02 01 06

British Standards
BSI DD ENV 206: 92 see: EN

1 02 01 07

German Standards
DIN 1045: 88

Structural Use of Concrete - Design and Construction

DIN 4420

Service and working scaffolding

DIN 4420-1: 90

General rules, safety requirements, tests

DIN 4420-2: 90

Ladder scaffolds; safety requirements

DIN 4420-3: 90

Types of scaffolding

DIN 4420-4: 88

Made of prefabricated elements; materials, design, loads


and safety requirements

DIN 18203

Tolerances for building construction

DIN 18203-1: 97

Prefabricated components made of concrete, reinforced


and prestressed concrete

DIN 18203-2: 86

Prefabricated steel components

DIN 18203-3: 84

Building components of timber and wood based panel


products

AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)

AHA

A 135.4

Basic Hardboard

DEPARTEMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC)


DOC PS-1

1 02 02

Construction and Industrial Plywood

Codes
ACI 318

Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

ACI 318R

Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete


Commentary

ACI 318M: 89

Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete


(318M-89/Revised 92)

ACI 318RM: 89

Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete


Commentary (318RM-89/Revised 92)

2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

1 03

Definitions

1 03 01

Technical Terms
Formwork - total system of support for freshly placed concrete including the mould or
sheathing which contacts the concrete as well as all supporting members, hardware,
and necessary bracing.
Shuttering - see: formwork.
False work - the temporary structure erected to support work in the process of
construction; composed of shoring or vertical posting, formwork for beams and slabs,
and lateral bracing.
Shoring - props or posts of timber or other material in compression used for the
temporary support of formwork.
Striking - the releasing or lowering of centering or other temporary support
Centering - false work used in the construction of arches, shells, space structures, or
any continuous structure where the entire false work is lowered (struck or decentered)
as a unit.
Propping - see: shoring.
Prop - vertical formwork member used as a brace.
Post - see: prop

1 03 02

Abbreviations
B.O.Q.

Bills of Quantities

Q.C.

Quality Control

1 04

System Description

1 04 01

Design Requirements

1 04 01 01

General

The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
The design shall be in accordance with ACI 318, ACI 347R and ACI 347
Formwork and its supporting structure comprising floor centers, timber, anchors, etc. shall be designed to
resist all vertical and horizontal forces, the design also taking into account the effect that the rate of
discharge and the method of compaction will have.
Adjustable floor centers and props shall be provided with a test mark in order to control the deflection.
Formwork shall be designed, constructed, and maintained so as to ensure that after removal of formwork
the finished concrete members will have true surfaces, free of offset, waviness and bulges and will
conform accurately to the indicated shapes, dimensions, lines, elevations, and positions within the
tolerances.
Formwork and scaffoldings shall be designed so they can be easily and safely removed without impact or
shock.

1 05

Submittals

In compliance with the Conditions of Contract and the provisions of Section 01300 the following shall be
submitted within thirty (30) days after the award of the Contract and written acceptance to be obtained
from the Engineer, before construction of formwork commences unless otherwise approved.

1 05 01

Product Data
The product data for each different type of formwork, accessory and other material
indicated.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Certificates of compliance - not more than 12 months old - with referenced standards for formwork and
accessories.

1 05 02

Shop Drawings

The shop drawings for formwork include the location of shoring, re-shoring and with location of all ties.
The plans for re-shoring, where permitted or required, with details of loads on structural members.

1 05 03

Samples

Samples of formwork coating materials to be used.


Unless otherwise required, samples shall be not part of the finished construction but shall be retained at
the job site until all work has been accepted.

1 05 04

Quality Control Submittals

Documented experience of Contractors site engineer(s), supervisor(s) and carpenter(s) (see: ref. 1 06 01
Part 1: General)
Reports and records of Contractors Source Q.C. (see: ref. 1 06 05 Part 1: General)
Reports and records of Contractors Field Q.C. (see: ref. 3 04 Part 3: Execution)
Reports and records of Contractors Internal Q.C. (see: ref. 1 06 04 01 Part 1: General)
Reports and records of Contractor's External Q.C. (see: ref. 1 06 04 02 Part 1: General)
Manufacturer's instructions concerning handling, installation and maintenance of formwork and
accessories.

1 05 06

Other Submittals
Records and reports of Contractors major equipment.

1 06

Quality Assurance

Sampling, testing and checking shall be recorded on a daily basis


(i.e. indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor if necessary.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than three (3) days after
testing and checking.
Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when the
defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Engineer for final acceptance.
Arrangements shall be made in Contractors work schedule and time allowed for testing and checking as
indicated.

1 06 01

Qualifications

Site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least five (5) years of documented
experience in reinforced concrete and concrete formwork. He shall have had successfully completed
reinforced concrete and concrete formwork similar in material, design, and extent to that work indicated
for the Project.
Formwork foremen shall have knowledge of concrete and related works at least three (3) years.
Carpenters shall be familiar with all materials and installation procedures and shall be skilled and trained.

1 06 04

Quality Control

1 06 04 01

Internal Quality Control

Contractors Internal Q.C. shall include but not be limited to:


Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance for formwork and accessories to be
delivered to the job site prior to first delivery and each shipment that comes from another source than the
previous one to conform compliance with specifications.
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Checking of suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and compliance with supply order
and specifications.
For additional requirements see: Section 03300 - Clause 1 06 04 02.

1 06 04 02

External Quality Control

See 1 06 03 Certifications

1 06 04 03

Source Quality Control

The source quality control is the responsibility of the Contractor.

1 07

Delivery, Storage and Handling

1 07 01

Packing and Shipping

The delivery of formwork materials shall be done in such a manner that damage can be prevented.
Formwork shall be clearly indicated and marked on the delivery note, invoice or supplier's certificate
supplied with a consignment, in particular the identification of the manufacturer, the country of origin, and
the standard which they comply with.
All materials shall not be contaminated.
Damaged formwork, damaged packaged materials,, and damaged accessories will not be accepted.

1 07 02

Storage and Protection

1 07 02 01

General

All formwork and accessories shall be stored in order to prevent damage, corrosion and impurities.
Formwork shall be stored, after cleaning and preparing for re-use if used before, in such a manner that
access to all different materials and kinds of formwork is available.
Materials which can be affected by weathering shall be stored in appropriate shelters.

1 07 02 02

Care and Storage of Used Formwork

Formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned and oiled as soon as possible after stripping.
Any open seams in panels shall be filled warped boards planed, metal facings straightened and joints rematched. Steel formwork shall be oiled on the back as well as on the face.
Following any necessary drying period of the coating material, the formwork shall be stacked off the
ground on 50 mm or heavier lumber protected against harmful weather conditions.

1 08

Project and Site Conditions

1 08 02 01

Dust Control

Dust caused by Contractors operations on and near work shall be controlled by use of all means
necessary.

1 08 02 02

Pollution Prevention

Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent pollution of ground with fuel, oil, chemicals or other
harmful materials.

1 09

Schedules and Programs

Construction procedure must be planned in advance to ensure the necessary safety of personnel
engaged in formwork and concrete placement and the integrity of the finished structure.

5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Part 2: Products
2 01
2 01 01

Formwork Materials
General

Materials for formwork are at the discretion of the Contractor and may be of wood, plastic, metal, or a
combination thereof for different purposes, unless otherwise indicated.
The formwork of exposed surfaces shall allow as indicated
01.0 fairfaced finish.
02.0 rough finish.

2 01 02

Architectural Concrete
01.0 Formwork
Formwork for architectural concrete shall be designed to produce the required
finish or finishes. Deflection of facing materials between studs as well as
deflection of studs and walers shall be limited to 0.025 times the span unless
otherwise specified.
02.0 Dressing
Where natural plywood formwork finish, grout cleaned finish, smooth rubbed
finish, scrubbed finish, or sand floated finish is required, formwork shall be
smooth (faced with plywood, liner sheets, or prefabricated panels) and true to
line, in order that the surfaces produced will require little dressing to arrive at true
surfaces.
Where any as-cast finish is required, no dressing shall be permitted in the
finishing operation.
03.0 Joints
Where as-cast surfaces, including natural plywood formwork finish, are specified,
the panels of materials against which concrete is cast shall be orderly in
arrangement, with joints between panels planned in approved relation to
openings, building corners, and other architectural features.
04.0 Formwork Ties
Where panels for as-cast surfaces are separated by recessed or otherwise
emphasized joints, the structural design of the formwork shall provide for locating
formwork ties, where possible, within the joints so that patches of tie holes will
not fall within the panel areas.
05.0 Fabricating Drawings
In addition to shop drawings normally required, fabricating drawings of formwork
for architectural concrete shall be submitted for approval showing the joining of
facing panels, the locations of formwork ties, and any necessary alignment
bracing.
06.0 Formwork Re-use
Formwork shall not be re-used if there is any evidence of surface wear and tear
or defect which would impair the quality of the surface. Formwork shall be
thoroughly cleaned and properly coated before re-use.
07.0 Formwork Accuracy
Formwork for architectural concrete shall be observed continuously while
concrete is being placed to see that there are no deviations from desired
elevation, alignment, plumbness, or camber.
If, during construction, any weakness develops and the formwork shows any
undue settlement or distortion, the work shall be stopped, the affected
construction removed, if permanently damaged, and the formwork strengthened.
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

2 01 03

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Materials

Formwork shall be metal, plastic, fiberglass or other material, which will produce the specified finish.
Materials used as formwork for profiled formwork, chamfers, splays, rebates and other features shall be
such that they produce the same finish as the main formwork.

Plywood for formwork shall have a close, uniform grain and edges shall be sealed with barrier paint,
polyurethane varnish or other impermeable material.

2 01 03 01

Formwork for Class A Finish

Formwork for all concrete works except for foundations and concrete surfaces in contact with soil shall be
Class A finished surface and shall be of modular prefabricated formwork system with skin of marine
plywood not less than 16mm thick, or specially designed and fabricated steel formwork system. In either
case the finished concrete surfaces shall be uniform, dense and smooth surface, free from staining,
discoloration, blemishes, grout runs or blowholes. Permitted abrupt irregularities shall be less than 1mm.
Gradual irregularities permitted shall not be more than 5mm in 2 meters Circular and curved formwork
shall be prefabricated with seamless material.

2 01 03 02

Formwork for Class B Finish

Formwork for foundations and concrete surfaces in contact with soil shall be Class B finished surface and
shall be steel or other approved material. The finished concrete surface shall be uniform and dense, free
of grout run, grain pattern, major blemishes or blowholes more than 5mm.

2 01 03 03

Steel joists and steel frame shoring

Formwork support shall be steel joints and steel frame shoring.

2 01 03 04

Formwork Ties

Formwork ties shall be factory-fabricated metal ties, shall be of the removable or internal disconnecting or
snap-off type, and shall be of a design that will not permit form deflection and will not spell concrete upon
removal. Solid backing shall be provided for each tie.
Except where removable tie rods are used, ties shall not leave holes in the concrete surface less than 6
mm nor more than 25 mm deep and not more than 25 mm in diameter.
Removable tie rods shall be not more than 38 mm in diameter.
Formwork ties for water tanks shall be of a type such that any removable part can be removed without
damaging the concrete. Any part left in the concrete shall be at least 40 mm or the specified nominal
cover to reinforcement which ever is greater from the concrete surface. Cement mortar for filling holes left
by form work ties and components shall consist of 1 part cement and 3 parts of aggregate with the
minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for compacting the mortar into
ties, the mix shall contain a non- shrink admixture.

2 01 03 05

Chamfer Strips

Chamfer strips shall be 12 mm 45 degree strips for beams and columns edges. With appropriate material
installed by the fabricator of the formwork for beam, columns, and opening in walls ... etc.

2 01 03 06

Formwork Releasing Agents

Formwork releasing agents shall be commercial formulations that will not bond with, stain or adversely
affect concrete surfaces. Agent shall not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces depending
upon bond or adhesion nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds.
Release agents shall be of a type which will not stain or color the concrete and which will not affect the
bond between the concrete and subsequent coverings. Release agents shall be of a type, which will not
affect the hardening of the concrete.
Release agents used on formwork for water retaining structure for potable and fresh water shall be nontoxic and shall not impart a taste to the water.
Release agents used on steel formwork shall contain a rust-inhibiting agent.
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Release agents used on formwork shall be chemical release agents.


In areas, which in the opinion of the Engineer are likely to be affected by pedestrian traffic, rain or dust,
release agents used on formwork shall be of a type, which evaporates to leave a dry film on the formwork
unless protection from such effects provided.

2 01 03 07

Cement Mortar For Concrete Surfaces

Cement mortar for filling blowholes where allowed shall consist of cement and fine aggregate together
with the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for completely filling the
blowholes.
Cement mortar for filling holes left by formwork ties and components shall consist of 1 part of cement to 3
parts of fine aggregate together with the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a consistency
suitable for compacting the mortar into the holes; the mix shall contain a non-shrink admixture.
Cement mortar for filling blowholes and holes left by formwork ties and components in concrete surfaces
shall be of the same color as the hardened concrete; light-colored sand or white cement may be used for
this purpose.

2 02

Formwork Accessories

2 02 01

Formwork Coatings

Provide formwork coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces
and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Part 3: Execution
3 02

General Preparation

3 02 01

Loading

Loading of new slabs or beams shall be avoided in the first few days after placement.
Loads such as aggregate, timber, boards, reinforcing steel or support devices shall not be thrown on new
construction nor be allowed to pile up in quantity.
When materials and components are distributed to the work position ensure that all design requirements
and project related information are considered.

3 03

Formwork Installation

Formwork shall be deemed to cover all surfaces required for containing concrete including stiffening,
bracing and tying and all props, shores and other supports to prevent over-stress of completed parts of
the structure.
Formwork with its necessary supports and braces shall be designed to safely support all vertical and
lateral forces that might be evident including the pressure of placing and vibrating of the concrete. The
design of formwork should also encompass their facile erection, unconstrained removal without damaging
the in-placed concrete, and efficient rotation.
Formwork shall be constructed and maintained so to ensure that after removal of formwork the finished
concrete members shall have true surfaces, free of undulations and will conform accurately to shapes,
dimensions, lines elevation and position with the tolerances for reinforced concrete buildings
specifications. Blowholes up to 5mm are accepted for finishes type A & B.
Formwork shall be designed and constructed by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of
ACI 347R for anticipated loads, lateral pressures, and stresses. Formwork shall be capable of producing
a surface, which meets the requirements of finish specified hereinafter. Formwork shall be capable of
withstanding the pressures resulting from placement and vibration of concrete. The Contractor shall
submit the design and details of formwork for the Engineers acceptance. Formwork shall be designed so
that concrete slabs, walls, and other members will be of correct dimensions, shape, alignment, elevation,
and position and within established tolerances. The formwork shall result in a final structure that conforms
to shapes, lines, and dimensions of the members as required by the design drawings and shall be in
accordance with the requirements of ACI 347 R
Formwork for all concrete works shall be of modular prefabricated formwork system with skin of marine
plywood not less than 16mm thick specially designed and fabricated steel formwork system or other
approved material. In either case the finished concrete surfaces shall be uniform, dense and smooth
surface, free from staining, discoloration, blemishes, grout runs or blowholes. Circular and curved
formwork shall be prefabricated with seamless material.
Formwork ties shall be factory-fabricated metal ties, of the removable or internal disconnecting or snap-off
type and shall be of a design that will not permit form deflection and will not spell concrete upon removal.
Solid backing shall be provided for each tie.
Except where removable tie rods are used, ties shall not leave holes in the concrete surface less than 6
mm nor more than 25 mm deep and not more than 25 mm in diameter.
Removable tie rods shall be not more than 38 mm in diameter.
Formwork ties shall be of a type such that any removable part can be removed without damaging the
concrete. Any part left in the concrete shall be at least 40 mm or the specified nominal cover to
reinforcement which ever is greater from the concrete surface. Cement mortar for filling holes left by
formwork ties and components shall consist of 1 part cement and 3 parts of aggregate with the minimum
amount of water necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for compacting the mortar into ties, the mix
shall contain a non- shrink admixture.
Formwork shall be mortar tight, properly aligned and adequately supported to produce concrete surfaces
meeting the surface requirements and conforming to construction tolerance given in TABLE 1 herein.
Where concrete surfaces are to have a Class A finish, joints in formwork panels shall be arranged as
approved.
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Where formwork for continuous surfaces are placed in successive units, care shall be taken to fit the
formwork over the completed surface so as to obtain accurate alignment of the surface and to prevent
leakage of mortar. Formwork shall not be reused if there is any evidence of surface wear and tear or
defects, which would impair the quality of the surface. Surfaces of formwork to be reused shall be cleaned
of mortar from previous concerting and of all other foreign material before reuse. Formwork ties that are to
be completely withdrawn shall be coated with a non-staining bond breaker.

3 03 01

Examination and Preparation

3 03 01 01

General

Important formwork have to be inspected and checked by the Engineer before the reinforcing steel is
placed to ensure that the concrete will have the dimensions and be in the location shown in the drawings
and that the formwork is safe.
Formwork shall be accurately set, clean, tight, adequately braced, and constructed of or lined with
materials that will impart the desired formed-surface finish to the hardened concrete.
Wood formwork shall be moistened before placing concrete. Formwork shall be made for removal with
minimum damage to the concrete. With wood formwork, use of too large or too many nails shall be
avoided to facilitate removal and reduce damage.

3 03 01 02

Formwork Joints

Formwork joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from the concrete.

3 03 01 03

Coating

Formwork for Class A finished surfaces shall be coated with a formwork-releasing agent before the
formwork or reinforcement is placed in final position. The coating shall be used as recommended in the
manufacturers printed or written instructions. Formwork for Class B finished surfaces may be wet with
water in lieu of coating immediately before placing concrete. Surplus coating on form surfaces and
coating on reinforcing steel and construction joints shall be removed before placing concrete.

3 03 01 04

Re-use

The number of re-uses is dependent on the resulting finish quality and is subject to approval by the
Engineer.
Formwork shall not be re-used after damage from previous uses or when they have reached the stage of
possible impairment to concrete surfaces.

3 03 02

Techniques and Workmanship

3 03 02 01

General

Formwork shall be constructed smooth, plumb, true, water and mortar-tight; sufficiently rigid and strong to
prevent sagging between supports and to maintain true position and shape during and after placing of
concrete, without waves or bulges.
Exceptional care shall be taken at dome frames and plywood formwork at finish surfaces to minimize fins,
ridges, offsets, leaking of fins and other defects as it is intended that the forming of these surfaces shall
be such as to require only a nominal amount of finishing to achieve a true, even surface.

3 03 02 02

Erection

3 03 02 02 01

Camber

The bottom of each beam shall have a camber according to the dimensions of the beam.
Where specific camber is noted, the formwork have to be positioned properly to maintain hardened
concrete lines within specified tolerances measured from camber lines.
For tolerances see Clause 3 03 04
The supporting struts shall be adjusted and fixed in position by suitable means and placed on timber
bearers where required.

10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

3 03 02 02 02

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Slopes

Sloped surfaces in excess of 35 deg from the horizontal (1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical) shall be provided
with a top formwork to hold the shape of the concrete during placement unless there is a continuous mat
of bars or mesh sufficient to keep the concrete in place.

3 03 02 02 03

Chamfering

External corners of columns, girders, beams, foundation walls projecting beyond overlying masonry, and
other external corners that will be exposed shall be chamfered, bevelled, or rounded by mouldings placed
in the formwork unless otherwise indicated.

3 03 02 02 04

Studs and Wales

Studs and walers shall be spaced to prevent deflection of formwork material.

3 03 02 02 05

Shores

Shores shall be adjustable by screw jacks or wedges.

3 03 02 02 06

Props

Shall not be adjusted after concrete has set.

3 03 02 02 07

Juncture

Formwork and joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout and cement paste during placing
of concrete. Waterproof tape, caulking, compressible seals and the like shall be used.
Joints in formwork shall be arranged vertically and horizontally to conform to the pattern of the design.
Junctions of formwork panels shall occur at architectural lines, vertical control joints, including alignment
with the masonry control joints, and construction joints.
01.0 Round Columns
Formwork for
round columns that will be exposed to view or painted shall be prefabricated and
of nearly seamless type.
02.0 Beam Formwork
All formwork for beams and similar members shall be designed and constructed
so that the sides may be removed without disturbing the bottom boards supports
thereto.
03.0 Bulkheads
Bulkheads for control joints or construction joints shall preferably be made by
splitting along the lines of reinforcement passing through the bulkheads so that
each portion may be positioned and removed separately without applying undue
pressure on the reinforcing rods which could cause spalling or cracking of the
concrete.
04.0 Bevelled inserts
Bevelled inserts at control joints shall be left undisturbed when formwork are
stripped, and removed only after the concrete has been sufficiently cured and
dried out. Wood strips inserted for architectural treatment shall be kerfed to
permit swelling without pressure on the concrete.

3 03 02 03

Stripping and Re-shoring

3 03 02 03 01

General

The concrete is to be regarded as sufficiently hardened when the component has attained such strength
that it can, with a degree of safety, resist all loads acting at the time of removal of formwork and shores.
Formwork shall be removed in such a manner as to ensure the complete safety of the structure. Where
the structure as a whole is adequately supported on shores, the removable floor formwork, beam and
girder sides, columns and similar vertical structural members shall be carefully lowered or loosened
respectively by using the devices for striking.
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

It is not permissible to knock those supports away abruptly or wrench them away forcibly. Shock or
vibration shall be avoided.
Particular care is necessary with components which have to carry virtually the full design load directly
upon removal of formwork; e.g. in the case of roofs or floor slabs which have to support loading from
floors above them which have not yet hardened .
Supporting formwork and shores may not be removed from beams, floors, and walls until these structural
units are strong enough to carry their own weight and any approved superimposed load, which at no time
shall exceed the live load for which the floor was designed unless provision has been made with the
approval of the Engineer to allow for anticipated temporary construction loads such as in multi-storey
work.

3 03 02 03 02

Stripping Times

When field operations are not controlled by control tests as per Clause .3 04 02, under ordinary conditions
formwork and supports shall remain in place for not less than the periods of time shown in Table 1.
These periods represent cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive,
during which the temperature of the air surrounding the concrete is above 10 deg C.
If high early-strength concrete is used, or in the case of very high temperatures, these periods may be
reduced as approved by the Engineer.
Conversely, in the case of temperatures less than 10 deg C or if retarding agents are used, these periods
may be increased at the discretion of the Engineer.

3 03 02 03 03

Re-shoring

Removal times are contingent on re-shores, where required, being as soon as practicable after stripping
operations are complete but not later than the end of the working day in which stripping occurs.
Where re-shores are required to implement early stripping while minimizing sag or creep, capacity,
placing and spacing of such re-shores have to be approved by the Engineer.

3 03 02 03 04

Removing of Re-shores

Final removal of re-shores shall be based on the same limits as removal of shores. Re-shoring shall not
be removed until the slab or members supported have attained sufficient strength to support all loads.
Removal of re-shores must be carried out so that the structure supported is not subject to impact or
loading eccentricities. In no case shall re-shores be removed within two days after placing a slab above or
within two floors below such a freshly placed slab.
Formwork shall be removed in a manner that will prevent injury to the concrete and ensure the complete
safety of the structure. Formwork for columns, walls, side of beams and other parts not supporting the
weight of concrete may be removed when the concrete has retained sufficient strength to resist damage
from the removal operation but not before 24 hours after the complication of the placement of concrete.
Formwork props and shoring of bottoms of beams and suspended slabs should not be removed before
the concrete has attained 70% of its ultimate design strength. In case the removal of formwork prior to this
constraint is allowed by the Engineer, the formwork should be removed in sections and propped as
approved by the Engineer. In no case the bottom of beams and suspended slabs should be stripped
before the elapse of 72 hours after the completion of the placement of the concrete. Depending on site
circumstances, the Engineer may require propping of the bottoms of beams and suspended slabs for the
full duration of 28 days.

3 03 03

Interface with other Products

3 03 04

Tolerances

This Clause provides tolerances for reinforced concrete structures.


The Contractor shall set and maintain concrete formwork so as to ensure completed work within the
tolerance limits.
Formwork shall be erected - unless otherwise directed - within the tolerances specified below.

12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

3 03 04 01

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Camber
01.0 Spans over 5.0 m shall have camber of 1.0 mm per meter of span measured at
the center, except where specific camber is noted.
02.0 Camber is to be maintained as noted +/- 3 mm until re-shoring is removed.

3 03 04 02

Variation from plumb

3 03 04 02 01

In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in arises:


In any 3 m length:

6 mm

Maximum for the entire length: 13 mm

3 03 04 02 02

For exposed corner columns, control joint grooves and other


conspicuous lines:
In any 6 m length

6 mm

Maximum for the entire length

8 mm

3 03 04 03

Variation from the level or slope indicated in drawings

3 03 04 03 01

In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits, and in arises, measured before


removal of supporting shores:
In any 3 m length

6 mm

Maximum for the entire length

3 03 04 03 02

3 03 04 04

10 mm

For exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other


conspicuous Iines
In any bay or 6 m length

6 mm

Maximum for the entire length

8 mm

Variation of the linear building lines from established positions in


planning related positions of columns, walls and partitions

3 03 04 05

In any bay or 6 m maximum

12 mm

Maximum for the entire length

13 mm

Variation in the sizes and locations of :


Sleeves floor openings and wall openings

3 03 04 06

+/- 6 mm

Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in


the thickness of slabs and walls
Minus 3 mm
Plus

6 mm

3 03 04 07

Variation in Footings

3 03 04 07 01

Variation in dimensions in plan


Minus 12 mm
Plus

3 03 04 07 02

50 mm

Misplacement or eccentricity
2 % of the footing in the direction of the misplacement but not more than
50 mm

3 03 04 07 03

Thickness
Decrease in specified thickness 5 %
13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Increase in specified thickness no limit

3 03 04 08

Variation in steps

3 03 04 08 01

In a flight of stairs
Rise

+/- 3 mm

Tread +/- 6 mm

3 03 04 08 02

In consecutive steps
Rise

+/- 2 mm

Tread +/- 3 mm

3 03 05

Formwork Accessories

Anchor bolts, plates, sleeves, frames, reglets, pipes, electrical boxes, duct openings, chases, conduits,
and inserts or fixtures for attachment of other work have to be installed or placed at locations and with
spacing indicated in the Drawings and in coordination with the relevant Sections.
Ample notification to all responsible for such items prior to installation time is required.
All items to be cast in the concrete and in the formwork for holes, chases and the like shall be accurately
set out and firmly fixed in position prior to the concrete being placed. No cutting away of concrete for any
of these items shall be permitted.
The items to be cast in shall be securely fixed to the formwork in such a way that they are not displaced
during the concreting operation and that there is no loss of material from the wet concrete through holes
in the formwork.
For further details see: Section 03300

3 03 05 01

Ties

The use of bolts or ties or any part of them, which remain cast into the concrete, if not directed otherwise,
will not be permitted. Ties shall be of an approved design whereby the whole of the tie shall be capable of
being removed so that no part remains embedded in the concrete.
No tie shall be nearer to any reinforcement in the concrete than the amount of cover to reinforcement
specified for the particular location.

3 04

Field Quality Control

3 04 01

General

See: Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete (3 04).

3 04 02

Concrete Strength Control Tests

Stripping times can be determined varying to the times shown in Table 1 provided the concrete strength is
confirmed by tests on cubes stored under the same conditions as the structure to be stripped (see:
Section 03300).
Removal of formwork and supports for suspended structures can be accomplished when 75 % at least
is reached of the designed compressive strength being required (nominal compressive strength) and
when the ratio of cube test compressive strength to design strength is equal to or greater than the ratio of
total dead load and construction load to the total design load.

3 05

Adjusting and Cleaning

3 05 01

Adjusting

Remove and replace damaged formwork.

14
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

3 05 02

Cleaning

3 05 02 01

General

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned from all dirt, mortar and foreign matter and coated before each
use. All steel formwork shall be free of rust and scale.

3 05 02 02

Cleanouts

Where necessary or required by the Engineer, temporary opening panels in the formwork to facilitate
cleaning, placing, and inspection shall be provided.

15
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Part 4: Method of Measurement


4 02

Units Of Measurement
Rate for formwork is included in the rates of concrete work and is not separately
measured or taken into consideration unless it is clearly mentioned in the Bills of
Quantities.

Where formwork is stated to be measured separately in the Bills of Quantities, the followings rules are to
apply.

4 02 01

Formwork measured by area

Formwork shall be measured by area (m2), taken as the net area in contact with the finished face of
concrete, classified as follows:
Soffits; formwork to soffits over 0.2 m wide.
Sloping upper surfaces, which shall include surfaces more than 15 deg from
horizontal
Sides of foundations, which shall include bases, pile caps and ground beams
Sides of walls, which shall include attached columns.
Returns to walls, which shall include ends, projections and reveals of openings
or recesses
Sides and soffits of beams, which shall include lintels and breaks in soffits;
isolated beams shall be so described
Sides of columns
Staircases, which shall include treads, risers and strings but exclude soffits
Other classifications (e.g. tunnel linings, bridges, bridge abutments) as may be
appropriate

4 02 02

Formwork measured by length

Formwork to edges, which shall include face of kerb or upstand or break in upper surface of floor, shall be
measured by length (m).
Soffits; formwork to soffits up to 0.2 m wide.

16
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Part 5: Basis of Payment


5 02

Ancillary Works to be Included in the Unit Rate

5 02 01

General

Rate for formwork is deemed to be included in the unit rate of concrete work and is not separately
measured or taken into consideration unless it is clearly mentioned in the Bills of Quantities.
The unit rate of concrete work should allow for formwork to include work to any height, all cutting,
notching, splayed edges, chamfers, allowance for overlaps and passing at angles, filleting to form
chamfered edges, splayed internal angles, grooves, throats, rebates, battens, strutting, bolting, wedging,
easing and striking and removal. No deductions shall be made for intersections of main beams with walls,
columns or secondary beams.
The unit rate for blinding shall include formwork at edge or extra width of concrete.

5 02 02

Concrete Strength Control Tests

The Contractor shall allow the cost involved for concrete cubes to be tested by an approved testing
laboratory or by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer or his Representative.

17
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Annex: Tables and Figures


Tables
Table 1: Stripping Times (see 3 03 02 03 02)
DL = Dead load

S tru ctu ral m em b er

S trip p in g tim e
w h ere d esig n live lo a d is
les s th an D L A

h ig h e r th a n
D LA

A rch centers

14 days

7 days

Joist, beam , or girder soffits


U nder 3.0 m clear span between supports
3.0m to 6.0 m clear span betwee n supp orts
O v er 6.0 m clear span betw een su pports

7 days
14 days
21 days

4 days
7 days
14 days

4 days
7 days
10 days

3 days
4 days
7 days

S labs
U nder 3.0 m clear span between supports
3.0 m to 6.0 m clear span between supports
O v er 6.0 m clear span betw een su pports
P ost-tensioned slab sy stem

A s soo n as full post-tensioning


has been ap plied

W alls
C olum ns
S ides of beam s and girders

12 24 hr
12 24 hr
12 24 hr

P an joist form s
750 m m wide or less
ov er 750 m m wide

3 days
4 days

18
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Annex:

Specific Information

7 01

Design Requirements (see Clause 1 04 01)


Formwork shall be designed, erected, supported, braced, and maintained so that it will
safely support all vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can
be supported by the concrete structure. Vertical and lateral loads must be carried to
the ground by the formwork system and by the in-place construction that has attained
adequate strength for that purpose.

7 02

Formwork Materials

7 02 01

General
Formwork for Exposed Finish Concrete
Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type
materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in
largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
Formwork for Unexposed Finish Concrete
Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at
least two edges and one side for tight fit.
Metal and Fiberglass Formwork Systems
These systems shall be shop-fabricated by fully qualified manufacturers specialized in
such work.

7 02 02

Wood
Timber and Lumber
Principle Use: Formwork framing, sheathing, and shoring.
Plywood
Principle Use: Formwork sheathing and panels.
Hardboard
The surface reaction with wet concrete shall be checked before using hardboard.
Principle Use: Formwork liner and sheathing; pan formwork for joint construction.

7 02 03

Metal
Steel
Principle Use: Heavy formwork and falsework
Column and joint formwork
Permanent formwork
Welding of permanent formwork
Aluminum
Aluminum shall be readily weldable, non-reactive to concrete containing calcium
chloride, and protected against galvanic action at points of contact with steel.
Principle Use: Lightweight panels and framing; bracing and horizontal shoring.

7 02 04

Plastics
Polystyrene, Polyethylene, Polyvinyl chloride
Principle Use: Formwork liners for decorative concrete.

19
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork

Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic


Principle Use: Ready-made column and dome pan formwork, custom-made formwork
for special architectural effects.

7 02 05

Combined and Other Materials


Fibre or Laminated Paper Pressed Tubes or Formwork
Principle Use: Column and beam formwork; void formwork for slabs, beams, girders,
and precast piles.
Corrugated Cardboard
Principle Use: Internal and under-slab voids; voids in beams and girders (normally
used with internal "egg crate" stiffeners).
Concrete
Foundations.
Permanent formwork.
Precast floor and roof units.
Moulds for precast units.
Plaster
Principle Use: Waste moulds for architectural concrete
Rubber
Principle Use: Formwork lining and void formwork.

7 02 06

Accessories
Formwork Coatings
Principle Use: Facilitating formwork removal
Insulating Board
Principle Use: Formwork insulation for cold weather protection of concrete
(permanent formwork).
Fibre wood
Fibre glass
Foamed plastic
Steel Joists and Steel Frame Shoring
Principle Use: Formwork support.
Form Ties, Anchors, and Hangers
Principle Use: For securing formwork against placing loads and pressures

20
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Division

03 - Concrete

Section

03200 - Concrete Reinforcement

Part 1: General
1 01

Summary

The work covered by this section consists of providing all plant, labor and materials and performing all
operations in connection with and necessary for the incorporation of steel reinforcement into the concrete
structure

1 01 01

Section includes
01.0 Steel Reinforcement for Structural Concrete
02.0 Steel Reinforcement for Prestressed Concrete
03.0 Steel Reinforcement for Precast Concrete
04.0 Steel Reinforcement for Unit Masonry

1 01 04

Related Sections
02500 Paving and Surfacing
03100 Concrete Formwork
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
03400 Precast Concrete
04200 Unit Masonry

1 02

References

The latest version of the publications listed below form a part of the Specifications, unless otherwise
specified. The publications are referred to in the text with the basic designation only.

1 02 01

Applicable Standards

1 02 01 03

International Standards

1 02 01 03 01

International Standard Organization (ISO)


ISO 6934
ISO 6934-1: 91
ISO 6934-2: 91
ISO 6934-3: 91
ISO 6934-4: 91
ISO 6934-5: 91

Steel for prestressing of concrete


General requirements
Cold drawn wire
Quenched and tempered wire
Strand
Hot-rolled steel bars with or without subsequent processing.

ISO 6935
ISO 6935-1: 91
ISO 6935-2: 91
ISO 6935-3: 92
ISO 10544: 92

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete


Plain bars
Ribbed bars
Welded fabric
Cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete
and the manufacture of welded fabric

1 02 01 04

USA Standards

1 02 01 04 01

American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)


ASTM A 184M: 96

Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats


for Concrete Reinforcement.
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A 416: 88b

Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire


Stress-Relieved for Prestressed Concrete.

ASTM A 496: 97a

Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete


Reinforcement.

ASTM A 497: 97

Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed,


for Concrete Reinforcement.

ASTM A 615M: 96a Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM A 82

Specification for steel wire, plain, for concrete reinforcement

ASTM A704/A704M Specification for welded steel plain Bar or rod Mats for concrete
reinforcement.

1 02 01 04 02

1 02 01 05

ASTM 706/A706M

Specification for low-alloy steel deformed bars for concrete


reinforcement.

ASTM A185

Steel welded wire fabric, plain, for concrete reinforcement

American Concrete Institute (ACI)


ACI 116R : 90

Cement and Concrete Terminology

ACI 301 : 96

Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings

ACI 315 : 92

Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement

ACI 315R : 94

Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced


Concrete

ACI 117

Tolerances for concrete construction and materials

ACI 318

Building code requirements for structural concrete

European Standards
ENV 10 080: 96

1 02 01 06

1 02 01 07

Steel for the Reinforcement of Concrete - Weldable Ribbed


Reinforcing Steel B500 - Technical Delivery Conditions for Bars,
Coils and Welded Fabric.

British Standards
BS 4482: 85

Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of


concrete.

BS 4483: 98

Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete.

BS 4486: 80

Specification for hot rolled and processed high tensile alloy steel
bars for the prestressing of concrete.

BS 5896: 80

Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for the
prestressing of concrete.

BS 8110

Structural use of concrete.

BS 8110-3: 85

Design charts for single reinforced beams, doubly reinforced


beams and rectangular columns.

BS 4449 2005

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete.

German Standards
DIN 488

Reinforcing steel

DIN 488-1: 84

Grades, properties, marking

DIN 488-2: 86

Reinforcing steel bars - Dimensions and masses

DIN 488-3: 86

Reinforcing steel bars Testing


2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

1 02 02

1 03

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

DIN 488-4: 86

Reinforcing steel fabric and wire - Design, dimensions and


masses

DIN 488-5: 86

Reinforcing steel fabric and wire Testing

DIN 488-6: 86

Inspection

DIN 488-7: 86

Verification of weldability of reinforcing steel bars Test


procedure and evaluation

DIN 1045: 88

Structural use of concrete - Design and construction

DIN 4099 : 85

Welding of reinforcing steel - Execution of welding work and


testing

DIN 4227-1 : 88

Prestressed concrete - Partly or fully prestressed normal-weight


concrete structural members.

Codes
ACI 318M/RM: 95

Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and


Commentary

ACI 318: 95/R: 95

Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and


Commentary

BS 8110-1: 97

Code of practice for design and construction.

BS 8110-2: 85

Code of practice for special circumstances.

EC 2: 89

Eurocode No. 2: Design of Concrete Structures

Definitions
For further definitions see ACI 116 and Section 03300.

1 03 01

Technical Terms
Characteristic value - value having a prescribed probability of not being attained in a
hypothetical unlimited test series.
Connection rebars - reinforcement partially and temporarily not embedded in
concrete due to the sequence of concrete placements or for assembling of precast
reinforced concrete members.
Construction joints - are formed by the interruption of concrete placements: the
bonded surface between the individual job sections to be concreted and to be
established prior to beginning concreting operations, designed to resist all loads and
stresses occurring.
Contraction joints - formed, sawed or tooled groove in a concrete structure to create
a weakened plane and to regulate the location of cracking.
Core - the part of a cross-section of the bar that contains neither longitudinal nor
transverse ribs.
Expansion joint - a separation provided between adjoining parts of a structure to
allow movement and extending through the entire structure.
Fabric - a geometrical arrangement of longitudinal and transverse wires that are
arranged substantially at right angles to each other and welded together at all points of
intersection.
Helical reinforcement - continuously wound steel reinforcement in the form of a
cylindrical helix (more commonly known as spiral reinforcement).
Hoop - a one-piece closed tie.

3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Lateral reinforcement - applied to ties, hoops, and spirals in columns and columnslike members.
Nominal cross-sectional area - the cross-sectional area equivalent to the area of a
circular plain bar of nominal diameter.
Reinforcing steel - steel (bar, fabric or wire) with a practically circular cross section
used for reinforcing concrete.
Reinforcing steel bars - reinforcing steel supplied in technically straight bars for
single reinforcement.
Reinforcing steel fabric - reinforcement prefabricated in a workshop from bars
assembled in a cross-wise fashion, joint together at the crossover points by means of
resistance spot welding to give resistance to shear.
Reinforcing steel wire - smooth or profiled reinforcing steel produced in the form of a
coil and fabricated into reinforcements in a workshop.
Spiral reinforcement - see helical reinforcement.
Splice - connection of one reinforcing bar to another by lapping, welding, mechanical
couplers, or other means.
Strand - steel wires twisted together into a reinforcement cable for prestressed
concrete.
Tie - loop of reinforcing bars encircling the longitudinal steel in columns.

1 03 02

Abbreviations
B.o.Q

Bills of Quantities

Q.C

Quality Control

1 04

System Description

1 04 01

Design Requirements

The design shall be in accordance with ACI 318

1 05

Submittals

In compliance with the Conditions of Contract and the provisions of Section 01300 the following shall be
submitted for approval after the award of the Contract within forty five (45) days

1 05 01

Product Data

The product data for each different type of steel reinforcement, accessory and other material indicated.

1 05 02

Working Drawings

Detail drawings shall be submitted and shall be in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 315, unless
otherwise specified. Drawings shall show support details including types, sizes and spacing. Dimensions
shall not be scaled from structural drawings to determine lengths of reinforcing bars.
The working and placing drawings for steel reinforcement shall be submitted for review with full details as
indicated:
01.0 position of all reinforcement.
02.0 detailed bar bending schedules.
03.0 welding locations and procedures.
04.0 any re-location of bars to an extent that causes placement tolerances to be
violated.
05.0 splices and mechanical connectors.
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

06.0 bending of reinforcement partially embedded in hardened concrete.

1 05 03

Samples

Samples of steel reinforcement and accessories (e. g. non-ferrous bar chairs, spacers and hangers).
Unless otherwise required, samples shall be not part of the finished construction but shall be retained at
the job site until all work has been accepted.

1 05 04

Quality Control Submittals

Documented experience of Contractors site engineers, supervisor(s) and steel fixer(s) (see: ref. 1 06 01
Part 1: General)
Reports and records of Contractors Source Q.C.(see: ref. 1 06 04 03 Part 1: General)
Reports and records of Contractors Field Q.C.(see: ref. 3 04 Part 3: Execution)
Reports and records of Contractors Internal Q.C.(see: ref. 1 06 04 01 Part 1: General)
Reports and records of Contractor's External Q.C.(see: ref. 1 06 04 02 Part 1: General)
Certificates of compliance - not more than 12 months old - with referenced standards for reinforcement
and accessories.
Manufacturer's instructions concerning handling, installation and maintenance of reinforcement and
accessories.
Contractors Quality Control Programs and Methods.

1 05 06

Other Submittals
01.0 Records and reports of Contractors major equipment (e. g. bending and cutting
machines).

1 06

Quality Assurance

Sampling, testing and checking shall be recorded on a daily basis


(i.e. indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor if necessary.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than three (3) days after
testing and checking.
Reports and records shall be established in a manner to ensure correlation between records, test results
and locations of reinforcing steel.
Arrangements shall be made in Contractors work schedule and time allowed for testing and checking as
indicated.

1 06 01

Qualifications

Site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least


five (5) years of documented experience in reinforced concrete works. He shall have successfully
completed reinforced concrete works similar in material, design, and extent to that work indicated for the
Project.
Steel reinforcing foremen shall have knowledge of reinforced concrete and related works.
Steel fixer shall be familiar with all materials and installation procedures and shall be skilled and trained.

1 06 04

Quality Control

1 06 04 01

Internal Quality Control

Contractors Internal Q.C. shall include but not be limited to:


Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance for steel reinforcement and
accessories to be delivered to the job site prior to first delivery and each shipment that comes from
another source than the previous one to conform compliance with specifications.
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Checking of suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and compliance with supply order
and specifications.
See: Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1 06 04 03

Source Quality Control

Each consignment of steel shall be accompanied by a manufacturer's delivery certificate or shall refer to a
previous certificate, if the consignment is from the same batch, showing that the steel complies with the
requirements.
If such certificate is not made available, or if the Engineer considers that the manufacturer's tests are
inadequate, samples shall be taken for acceptance tests from different consignments as directed and
shall be tested in accordance with the specified standards at Contractor's expense. Should the result of
such tests show that any sample does not comply with the specifications, the whole consignment will be
rejected and removed from the Site at the Contractor's expense.
Acceptance tests will be directed if the fabrication of the reinforcing steel is not inspected by an
independent third party and certified in accordance with DIN 488-6 or equivalent.
The following tests shall be performed:
01.0 Steel Bars
- Tensile test.
- Bending test.
- Determination of diameter and cross-sectional area.
02.0 Steel Fabric
- Shear strength test for weld joints.
- Determination of dimensions.
- Tensile test.
- Appearance test .
- Bending test.

1 07

Delivery, Storage and Handling

1 07 01

Packing and Shipping

Steel bars shall be delivered in bundles firmly secured and tagged. Strands shall be supplied wounds on
reels or coils.
Each bar or bundle of bars shall be identified by marks stamped onto the surface of each bar and the
identifying mark shall contain the following information in accordance with the standard indicated:
- Name of the manufacturer and/or his trademark.
- Standard to which the bars have been manufactured.
- The class, type and strength respectively.
- The diameter.
- The number of the test certificate.
Each coil or reel of strands shall carry a label giving the following details:
- The number and appropriate section of the standard to which the strands have been
produced.
- Nominal diameter of strand.
- Specified characteristic load.
- Coil or reel number.
- Number of the test certificate to which the coil or reel number refers.
- Net mass in kg.
- Manufacturers name.
The delivery of steel reinforcement shall be done in such a manner in order to prevent any damage.
All materials shall not be contaminated.
Damaged steel reinforcement and damaged accessories will not be accepted.
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

1 07 02

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Storage and Protection

The method of storage shall be approved by the Engineer.


All reinforcement and accessories shall be stored in order to prevent damage, corrosion and impurities.
Steel reinforcement delivered to the Site and not immediately placed in forms shall be stored in racks, or
other supports, at least 150 mm above ground.
Steel reinforcement stored at the Site or any other storage area shall be protected from rusting, damage,
contamination or the effects of local environment.
Bars of differing diameters and grades of steel shall be kept separate.
Any reinforcement exposed to chloride contamination shall be thoroughly washed with clean fresh water
prior to fixing, and if necessary before concreting.
Reinforcement shall not be dropped from a height greater than 50cm at any time.

1 08

Project and Site Conditions

1 08 02 01

Dust Control

Dust caused by contractors operations on and near work shall be controlled by used of all means
necessary.

1 08 02 02

Pollution Prevention

Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent pollution of ground with fuel, oil, chemicals or other
harmful materials.

7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Part 2:

Products

2 01

General

Reinforcing steel shall be fabricated to shapes and dimensions in compliance with the applicable
provisions of standards and as indicated on the drawings.
Reinforcement shall be free of loose or flaky rust and mill scale, or coating, and any other substance that
would reduce or destroy the bond.
Reinforcing steel reduced in section shall not be used.

2 02

Reinforcing Steel

2 02 01

Reinforcing Steel Bars

Dimensions, classification and properties shall be as indicated in the. Bills of Quantitiesor elsewhere.
Reinforcing steel shall comply with:
* 01.1 ISO 6935-2
* 01.2 BS 4461
* 01.3 DIN 488
* 01.4 ASTM A 615M.
02.0 The steel bars shall comply with the structural design and shall be: Hot rolled
ordinary tensile and / or Hot rolled high tensile and / or Cold worked high tensile
twisted, as shown in drawings of grade 400 and shall have a yield stress or proof
stress not less than 400 Mpa and an ultimate tensile strength not less than 600 Mpa..
Stirrups shall be made from normal grade steel grade 24/36 there yield stress shall not less than 240
MPa and ultimate stress shall not less than 360MPn.
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in the Drawings. Reinforcement shall be clean and free from
loose mill scale, loose rust, oil, grease, tar, paint, mud, retarders, concrete, earth, and contamination by
salts or other deleterious matter and shall be maintained in such condition up to the time of concreting.
Pitted bars shall not be used. Torch cutting of steel bars shall not be permitted.
All steel reinforcement shall be obtained from the same source and shall have uniform properties all
through the duration of the works.
Samples of the different diameters and types of steel reinforcement shall be taken at intervals, as
specified by the Engineer, and sent to an accepted authorized laboratory for testing

2 02 02

Reinforcing Steel Fabric

Dimensions, classification and properties shall be as indicated in the Project B.o.Q. or otherwise noted
Reinforcing steel fabric shall comply with:
* 01.1 ISO 6935-3
* 01.2 BS 4483
* 01.3 DIN 488
* 01.4 ASTM A 184.
02.0 Welded steel fabric shall be factory made from cold reduced high tensile steel
bars or wires unless otherwise indicated and shall comply with the structural design
(Clause 1 04 01).

2 02 03

Reinforcing Steel Wire


Dimensions, classification and properties shall be as indicated in the Project B.O.Q. or
otherwise.
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Wire ties shall be 1.6 mm diameter or heavier black annealed steel wire or otherwise.Reinforcing steel
wire shall conform to 2 and shall be tested according to 107 and 690.
Reinforcing steel wire shall be produced cold reduced.
The steel grade shall be not less than 500 N/mm2.
Reinforcing steel wire shall comply
* 01.1 ISO 10544
* 01.2 BS 4482
* 01.3 DIN 488
* 01.4 ASTM A 496.
02.0 Steel wire shall comply with the structural design

2 02 04

Reinforcing Steel for Prestressed Concrete

All bars and strands shall be sound and free from harmful surface defects. Until the bars and strands are
built-in the Contractor shall give adequate protection to prevent corrosion and damage to threaded ends.
Production lengths shall contain no welds.
All bars and strands shall not be subject to any subsequent welding operations.
Unless otherwise indicated, strands shall not be coated with any lubricant, oil or other matter to a degree
likely to impair adhesion to concrete.
High tensile reinforcing bar and wire for pre-stressed reinforcing shall be in accordance with one of the
following standards:
* 01.0 ISO 3934
* 02.0 DIN 4227-1
* 03.0 BS 5896
* 04.0 ASTM A 416.

2.02.05

Welded Wire Fabric

Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185 or ASTM A497.

2 03

Reinforcing Steel Accessories

2 03 01

Supports for Reinforcement

Space chairs spacers and hangers shall be in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 315, ACI 318, DIN 1045 or
an equivalent standard.
All chairs shall be plastic, galvanized steel, plastic protected or stainless steel within 13 mm of concrete
surface if indicated and approved.
For further details concerning accessories see the related Section 03300 - Cast-In Place Concrete.

2 04

Tolerances

2 04 01

Steel Bars

Reinforcement steel bars used for concrete reinforcement shall meet the following requirements for
fabricating and bending tolerances:
01.0 Sheared length: +/- 25 mm
02.0 Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties and spirals: +/-10 mm
03.0 All other bends: +/- 25 mm.
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Part 3:

Execution

3 01.01

Bar Bending Schedules

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Reinforcement bending schedules listing the cut lengths, diameter or size, bending dimensions and
locations of each bar in the work shall be provided by the Contractor. The cutting and bending of bars
shall not commence until the bar bending schedules have been checked by the Engineer against the
reinforcement Drawings and the corresponding general arrangement Drawings. The Contractor shall also
check that the correct grade of reinforcement on the schedule corresponds to the Drawings. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all delays and changes arising directly from failure to comply with
these requirements.
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the minimum lap lengths and effective anchorage lengths for
parts under stress shall be full tension lengths in accordance with ASTM A 704.

3 01.02

Bending

Steel reinforcement shall be cold bent to the forms and dimensions shown in the Drawings and in
accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 315. No heating will be allowed to facilitate bending. Bending of bars
shall be carried out slowly at a steady even pressure without jerks or impact.
Bent bars shall not be re-bent unless permitted by the Engineer. Any reinforcement showing signs of
fracture shall be rejected and removed from the Site.
Diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar, other than for stirrups and ties in sizes #3 through
#5, shall not be less than the values given in Table 7.2 of ACI 318.
Inside diameter of bend for stirrups and ties shall not be less than 4 times the nominal diameter of bar, for
#5 bar and smaller. For bars larger than #5, diameter of bend shall be in accordance with Table 7.2 of
ACI 318.
Inside diameter of bend in welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed) for stirrups and ties shall not be less
than 4 times the nominal diameter of bar for deformed wire larger than D6 and twice the nominal diameter
of bar for all other wires.
After bending, the bars shall be marked for identification and shall be stored, as described in Clause 1.5,
until required for use.

3 02

General Preparation

3 02 01

General

When materials and components are distributed to the work position ensure that all design requirements
and project related information are considered.
After any substantial delay in the work previously placed, reinforcing steel left for future bonding shall be
inspected and cleaned.

3 03

Steel Reinforcement Installation

Bending, placement and fixing of reinforcement shall be in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 315, ACI 318,
DIN 1045 or an equivalent standard.

3 03 01

Reinforcing Steel Bars and Steel Fabric

3 03 01 01

Bending and Re-bending

Bars shall be bent cold.


Reinforcing steel shall not be bent or straightened in a manner injurious to the steel or concrete. Bars with
kinks or bends not shown on drawings shall not be placed. The use of heat to bend or straighten
reinforcing steel will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
Re-bending or straightening of reinforcement shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Connection rebars shall not be field bent, except as shown in the drawings or approved by the Engineer.
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

If warm bending is approved, bars shall not be cooled by quenching.


Reinforcing steel shall not be pickled or galvanized unless approved. Precautions have to be taken to
control embrittlement of a bent bar and the production of hydrogen in the concrete.

3 03 01 02

Welding

Welding of reinforcing steel shall conform to DIN 4099 or an equivalent standard.


The welding processes given in Table 1 shall be used as appropriate.
No welding of reinforcing steel shall be carried out unless shown in the drawings or otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
Such welding shall be made by a welder carrying a certificate of an approved institution, showing that he
passed a welding course for this particular type of work.
No welding shall be done at the bend of a bar and not within 75 mm of a bend having an internal diameter
less than 12 bar diameters, or any part of a bar that has been bent and subsequently bent in the reverse
direction or straightened.
Welding of crossing bars (tack welding) will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
Reinforcement which is specified to be welded shall be welded by any process which demonstrates by
bending and tensile tests that the strength of the parent metal is not reduced and that the weld possesses
a strength not less than that of the parent metal. The welding procedure established by successful test
welds shall be maintained and no departure from this procedure shall be permitted.

3 03 01 02.01

Mechanical Couplings

Mechanical couplings for splicing steel bars shall be accepted by the Engineer and shall be installed with
equipment supplied by the coupling manufacturer and operated in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. The specified minimum cover to reinforcement shall be maintained at the couplers.
Where sockets of connectors are left for connection of future works, they shall be protected by packing
with grease and closed with a screw fitting durable plug

3 03 01 03

Splicing

Splices and development of reinforcements shall be according to ACI 318-95 and in conformance with the
UBC 97 Section 1912. Splicing shall be by lapping, by mechanical connection or welded splices (lap or
butt) unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and/or by the Engineer. Lap splices shall not be used for
bars larger than 32 mm diameter, and welded splices or mechanical connections shall be used for larger
bars. Welded butt splices shall be full penetration butt welds. Lapped bars shall be placed in contact and
securely tied or spaced transversely apart to permit the embedment of the entire surface of each bar in
concrete. Lapped bars shall not be spaced apart further than one-fifth the required length of lap or
150mm. Mechanical splices shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the
mechanical splicing device. Butt-welded and mechanical splices shall develop 125 percent of the
specified minimum yield tensile strength of the spliced bars or of the smaller bar in transition splices. Bars
shall be flame dried before butt-welding splicing. Adequate jigs and clamps or other devices shall be
welding spliced in a straight line.
Not more than 25% of the reinforcing steel shall be spliced at the same location. For lap splices, Tension
Lap Length or compress lap length shall be used depending on the state of stress in the considered bar
or the location of there bars within the structural elements. Shop drawing showing the exact location of
splices as well as length of lap splice shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before construction.
Clear distance between parallel bars in a layer shall be not less than nominal diameter of bar nor 25mm.
Where parallel reinforcement is placed in two or more layers, bars in the upper layers shall be placed
directly above bars in the bottom layer with a clear distance between layers of not less than 25mm.
In spirally reinforced or tied reinforced compression members, clear distance between longitudinal bars
shall not be less than 1.5 times the nominal diameter of bar, nor 40mm.
Clear distance limitation between bars shall apply also to the clear distance between a contact lap splice
and adjacent splices or bars.
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

3 03 01 04

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Lateral Reinforcement

Lateral reinforcement shall be executed in accordance with the working drawings.


All changes are subject to the approval of the Engineer.

3 03 01 04 01

Spiral and Tie Reinforcement for Compressive Members

Spiral reinforcement shall consist of evenly spaced continuous helix held firmly in place and true to line by
vertical spacers.
All bars shall be enclosed by lateral ties.

3 03 01 05

Concrete Protection for Reinforcement

The concrete cover shall be sufficiently thick and dense to ensure an effective bond and to provide
protection against fire and corrosion.
The concrete cover of reinforcement shall be as shown in the working drawings unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer and shall be measured as the minimum distance between the outside of any
reinforcement embedded in the concrete (including fittings) and the nearest permanent surface of the
concrete member, excluding plaster, render or other surface finishes.
Fire-protective covering shall be as shown in the working drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
If any measure of concrete cover is missing in the drawings, the limits as per Clauses 3 03 01 05 01 to 3
03 01 05 03 below shall apply.

3 03 01 05 01

Cast-In-Place-Concrete (non prestressed)

The minimum concrete cover shown in the working drawings shall comply with the structural design and
ACI 301, ACI 315 and ACI 318 as shown in Table 2.1.1 and Table 2.1.

3 03 01 05 02

Precast Concrete (manufactured under plant control conditions)

The minimum concrete cover shown in the working drawings shall comply with the structural design and
ACI 318 as shown in Table 3 .

3 03 01 05 03

Prestressed Concrete

The minimum concrete cover shown in the working drawings shall comply with the structural design and
ACI 318 as shown in Table 4.

3 03 01 06

Exposed Reinforcement

Exposed reinforcement inserts, and plates intended for bonding with future extensions shall be protected
from corrosion.

3 03 01 07

Placement

Reinforcing steel shall be placed and fixed in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318, DIN 1045 or an
equivalent code or standard.
Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings and shall be supported and maintained in
position by using a sufficient number of spacers, chairs or supporting frames. Spacers shall be securely
fixed to the reinforcement at the time of placing concrete.
Reinforcement shall not be continuous through expansion joints and shall be as indicated through
construction or contraction joints.
Bars, wire fabric, wire tie, support, and other devices necessary to install and secure reinforcement shall
be as specified in ACI 318. Reinforcement shall not contain rust, scale, oil, grease, clay, or foreign
substances that would reduce the bond with concrete. Rusting of reinforcement is a basis of rejection if
the effective cross-sectional area or the nominal weight per unit length of the reinforcement has been
reduced to less than that specified in ASTM A618 and ACI 318. Loose rust shall be removed prior to
placing steel.
Special care shall be exercised to assure that the bars are not coated with salts or other chemicals, which
may cause corrosion of the reinforcing, steel after placing in the concrete.
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

All reinforcement shall be supported and fastened together to prevent displacement by construction loads
or the placing of concrete beyond the tolerances indicated.
Supports of reinforcing steel shall be bent as shown in the drawings, and shall be accurately placed and
adequately supported by concrete or other chairs, spacers or ties as approved and be maintained in
position within the permissible tolerance until the concrete has hardened.
Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or
embedded items. If bars are moved by more than one bar diameter or enough to exceed the tolerances
indicated in the drawings and Specifications, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
Install reinforcing steel wire in top of concrete slabs where shown in drawings or otherwise indicated. Lap
all construction and contraction joints 150 mm and wire securely. Extent steel wire or fabric within 50 mm
of sides and ends of slabs.
Vertical bars in columns shall be offset at least one bar diameter at lapped splices. To ensure proper
placement, templates shall be furnished for all column dowels.
Except where otherwise shown in the Drawings or specified, the nominal concrete cover to the
reinforcement exclusive of plaster or other decorative finish and concrete bindings shall be as follows:
For foundations:

70 mm

For Shell:

50 mm

For Slabs:

20 mm

For Columns, and beams:

25 mm

For Walls:

40 mm

No part of the reinforcement shall be used to support formwork, access ways, working platforms, or the
placing equipment or for conducting an electric current.
No concreting shall be commenced until the Engineer has inspected and accepted the placed
reinforcement.

3 03 02

Placing and Protection of Tendons and Prestressing Accessories

3 03 02 01

Tendons and Sheathing

Tendons and sheathing for use in bonded construction shall be checked before placing to be free of
grease, oil, paint and other foreign matter. A light coat of rust is permissible, provided loose rust has been
removed and the surface of the steel is not pitted.
Grout fittings and sheathing for bonded construction shall be adequately protected from collapse and
other damage. Prior to placing concrete, the sheathing and grout fittings shall be examined for holes. All
such holes shall be repaired. If the tendon is to remain ungrouted for more than 28 days from the time of
tendon placement, temporary corrosion protection shall be provided.
Tendons for use in unbonded construction shall be clean and undamaged and shall be permanently
protected as indicated.

3 03 02 02

Anchorage

End anchorages, which will be permanently protected with concrete, shall be free of loose rust, grease, oil
and other foreign matter except paint.

3 03 02 03

Projecting Reinforcement

No item of projecting reinforcement shall be bent, or otherwise disturbed, after any part of it is embedded
in concrete, unless the Engineer's prior acceptance is obtained.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that projecting reinforcement is
protected to prevent undue rusting and/or subsequent staining of finished surfaces by
water running off rusted bars.
13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

3 03 03

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Interface with other Products

Conduits and pipes of aluminum shall not be embedded in structural concrete unless effectively coated or
covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction or electrolytic action between aluminum and steel.

3 03 04

Tolerances

3 03 04 01

Steel Bars

Unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer, reinforcement shall meet the fabricating
tolerances and be placed in its specified position within the tolerances given as follows, such that the
nominal concrete cover indicated shall not be encroached upon.
Reinforcement shall be placed and secured with non-corrodible chairs, spacers, or metal hangers.
Concrete or other non-corrodible material shall be used for supporting reinforcement on the ground.
Tolerances for reinforcement placement shall be as specified in clause 2.2 of ACI 117-90.
Placing Tolerances:
Clear distance to formed surfaces

+ 5 mm; - 3 mm

Spacing between bars

+/- 5 mm

Top bars in slabs and beams:


nominal cover
Members 200 mm deep or less

+ 5 mm; - 3 mm

Members more than 200 mm but not over 600 mm deep

+ 10 mm; -3 mm

Members more than 600 mm deep

+ 25 mm; -3 mm

Crosswise of members, spaced evenly:

within 50.0 mm

Lengthwise of members:

within 50.0 mm

Minimum cover to reinforcement below ground 50 mm in minimum.

3 03 04 02

Tendons and Prestressing Accessories

Tendons, sheathing and anchorages shall be firmly supported to prevent displacement during concrete
placement.
They shall be placed within the following tolerances:
Concrete dimensions of: 200 mm or less
over 200 mm but not over 600 mm
over 600 mm

+/- 6.0 mm
+/- 9.5 mm
+/-12.5 mm

The tolerances apply separately to both vertical and horizontal dimensions and may be
different for each direction except that in slabs the horizontal tolerance shall not
exceed 25 mm in 4.50 m of tendon length.
The bearing surface between anchorages and concrete shall be concentric with and
perpendicular to the tendons within +/-1 degree.

3 03 05

Steel Reinforcement Accessories

3 03 05 01

Construction and Contraction Joints

All reinforcement shall be continued across construction and contraction joints.

3 03 05 02

Expansion Joints

Reinforcement or other embedded material items bonded to the concrete (except dowel in floors bonded
on only one side of joints) shall not be permitted to extent continuously through any expansion joint.

14
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

3 04

Field Quality Control

3 04 01

General

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

See: Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete and Section 03100 Concrete Formwork.

3 04 02

Inspection

The Contractor shall give the Engineer 24 (twenty four) hours notice and opportunity to inspect all
placement of reinforcing steel before concrete is poured. Reinforcement shall be in place and placement
approved far enough ahead of concreting operation to prevent these operations from interfering with each
other.

15
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Part 4:

Method of Measurement

4 01

General

Rate for reinforcement steel is deemed included in the unit rate of concrete work and is not separately
measured or taken into consideration unless it is clearly mentioned in the Bills of Quantities.
Where reinforcement is stated to be measured separately in the Bills of Quantities, the followings rules
are to apply.

4 02

Units of Measurement

4 02 01

Reinforcing Steel Bars, Steel Fabric and Steel Wire

Steel bars, steel fabric and steel wire will be measured by weight (kg), taken from the steel bending lists
in accordance with the As-Built Drawings.
Steel fabric will be measured with no allowance for laps and splices.

4 02 02

Reinforcing Steel for Prestressed Concrete

Prestressed tendons will be measured by length.


The lengths of post-tensioned tendons will be measured to outer faces of anchorage.
The lengths of pre-tensioned tendons will be measured to the surfaces of the concrete members.
Anchorages will be enumerated (no).

16
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Part 5:

Basis Of Payment

5 01

General

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Rate for reinforcement steel is deemed included in the unit rate of concrete work and is not separately
measured or taken into consideration unless it is clearly mentioned in the Bills of Quantities.

5 02

Ancillary Works to be Included in the Unit Rate

5 02 01

General

The unit rate of concrete work should allow for reinforcing steel to include cutting, rolling and bending
margins, distance blocks, chairs, spacers, tying wire and the like.

5 02 02

Control and Other Tests

The Contractor shall allow the cost involved for testing of all reinforcements.
.

17
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Annex:

Tables and Figures

6 01

Tables

6 01 01

Welding of Reinforcement

Table 1: Permitted welding processes and applications in accordance with DIN 1045
(18.6.6).

Type of loading

W elding process

Tension bars

Com pression
bars

Flash welding

Butt joints

Gas pressure welding

Butts joints where d s 14mm

Metal arc welding with covered


electrode 31)

Strap joints, tap joints, cross joints 33) ,


and connection to other steel parts

Predom inantly
static
3

Metal active gas welding

32)

Butt joints where


d s 20mm
4

Resistance spot welding

Lap joints where d s ?12mm,


And cross joints 33)

Flash welding

Butt joints

Gas pressure welding

Butt joints where D s 14m m

Metal arc welding with covered


electrode
Metal active gas welding

Repeated

Butt joints where


d s 20mm

31) The nom inal diam eter of bars shall be not less than 8 m m.
32) The nom inal diam eter of bars shall be not less than 6 m m.
33) with d s not exceeding 16 m m for load bearing connections.

18
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

6 01 02

Minimum Concrete Cover

6 01 02 01

Cast-In-Place-Concrete (non pre-stressed)

Table 2.1:

Minimum concrete cover for reinforcement


Minimum
cover, mm
(a) Concrete cast against
and permanently exposed to
earth

70

(b) Concrete exposed to


earth or weather:[Note: See
code interpretation page ii.]

No. 20 through No. 55


bars.
No. 15 bar, W31 or D31 wire,
and smaller .

50
40

Concrete not exposed to


weather or in contact with
ground:

Slabs, walls , joists:


No. 45 and No. 55 bars ..
No. 35 bar and smaller

40
20

Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement, ties,
stirrups spirals .

40

Shells, folded plate


members:
No. 20 bar and larger .
No. 15 bar, W31 or D31
wire,
and smaller .

a) According to ACI 318 (7.7.1)

20
15

b) according to ACI 301 (3.3.2.3)

19
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Table 2. 2:

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Concrete cover, type of structural element and bar spacing


in accordance with ACI 315 (2.7.1).

Category, according to center-tocenter bar spacing

Reinforcing bars in structural


element
Concrete
cover
Longitudinal bars in beams and
columns, and inner layers of
walls or slabs

All other reinforcing bars

3db

> 3db
< 4db

4db
< 6db

6db

db

> db

db

> db
< 2db
2db

Where db = nominal diameter of a bar

20
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Table 2.3:
Minimum concrete cover for corrosion protection
an bonding in accordance with DIN 1045 (13.2).

Environmental conditions to which members


are subjected

Bar
diameter,
ds, in mm

Minimum
cover for B 25
and over, min
c, in cm

Nominal
cover for B
25 and over,
nom c, in cm

Up to 12
14, 16
20
25
28

1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0

2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0

Up to 20
25
28

2.0
2.5
3.0

3.0
3.5
4.0

Up to 25

2.5

3.5

28

3.0

4.0

Up to 28

4.0

5.0

1 Members in enclosed rooms, e.g. in dwellings


(including kitchen, bathroom and laundry),
offices, schools, hospitals and shops, unless
the criteria given in lines 2 to 4 apply.
Members which are kept permanently free of
moisture.

2 Members to which outside air has constant or

frequent access, e.g. in open sheds and


garages.
Members which remain permanently under
water or in the soil, unless the criteria given in
lines 3 and 4 or other criteria apply. Roofs with
a watertight roof covering (for the side on
which the covering is situated).
Members in the open.
Members in enclosed rooms with a high
frequency of very high humidity at normal
room temperature, e.g. in canteen kitchens,
bathrooms, laundries, cattle sheds and rooms
situated in indoor swimming pools, which are
exposed to high humidity. Members that are
exposed to repeated humidification, e.g. as a
result of the frequent formation of
condensation, or members designed for use in
the tidal zone.
Members exposed to slightly aggressive
chemical attack as defined in DIN 4030.
Members in which concrete or steel is exposed
to particularly corrosive action, e.g. due to
constant action of aggressive vapours or deicing salts or to aggressive chemical attack as
defined in DIN 4030 (see also subclause 13.3)

21
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

6 01 02 02
conditions)
Table 3:

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Precast Concrete (manufactured under plant control


Minimum concrete cover for reinforcement
in accordance with ACI 318 (7.7.2).

(a) Concrete exposed to earth or weather :


Wall panels :
No. 45 and No. 55 bars
No. 35 bar and smaller .

Minimum Cover , mm
40
20

Other members:
No. 45 and No. 55 bars
No. 20 through No. 35 bars .
No. 15 bar, W31 or D31 wire. and smaller .

50
40
30

(b) Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact


with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists:
No. 45 and No. 55 bars ..
No. 35 bar and smaller .

30
15

Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement . ..
Ties, stirrups, spirals ..
Shells, folded plate members:
No. 20 bar and larger .
No. 15 bar, W31 or D31 wire and smaller

db but not less than 15


and need not exceed 40
10
15
10

22
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

6 01 02 03

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Pre-stressed Concrete
The minimum concrete cover as shown in Table 4 shall be provided for prestressed an
non-prestressed reinforcement, ducts, and end fittings, except as provided in 6 01 02
01 and 6 01 02 02.
For prestressed concrete members manufactured under plant control conditions,
minimum concrete cover for non-prestressed reinforcement shall be as required in 6
01 02 02.

Table 4:Minimum concrete cover for reinforcement


in accordance with ACI 318 (7.7.3).

(a) Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to


earth

Minimum cover, mm
70

(b) Concrete exposed to earth or weather:


Wall panels, slabs, joists
Other members .

30
40

(c) Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with


ground:
Slabs, walls, joists ..

20

Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement
Ties, stirrups, spirals .

40
20

Shells, folded plate members:


No. 15 bar, W31 or D31 wire, and smaller ..
Other reinforcement .

10
db but not less than 20

23
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Annex:

Specific Information

7 01

General
The design of steel reinforcement for structural concrete depends on the selection of
the various standards and specifications for design, structural analysis and materials.
While DIN 1045 and DIN 488 consider only high tensile reinforcing steel with a yield
strength not less than 420 N/mm2, 2, 224, ISO 6935-1, 6935-2 and EC 2, ACI 318 and
ASTM A 615M allow ordinary tensile steel classes of 220, 240, 250 and 300 N/mm2
yield strength.
224 allows interwoven or clipped steel fabric, whereas international standards accept
only welded connections.
Other differences concern diameter, masses, chemical composition, tolerances, bend
mandrel diameter etc..
In order to demonstrate the importance of specifying the most favourable standards,
this Annex shows excerpts and examples of various standards and specifications for
essential design criteria which should be considered by the Project specifier for the
structural design, preparation of shop-drawings and steel bending lists (Clause 1 04
01) and for the specification of the material (Clause 2 02).
For further references and advise to specify how, what and where, see ACI 301.

7 02

Products

7 02 01

Reinforcing Steel Bars

7 02 01 01

Classification and Mechanical Properties


The minimum mechanical properties of reinforcing steel shall conform to one of the
following tables:

Table 1.1

Classification and mechanical properties according to 2


Property
2

Yield stress, min. N/mm


2
Tensile strength, min. N/mm
Elongation percentage
calculated on gauge length 5D*
min.

Hot rolled steel bars


Ordinary tensile
High tensile
250
460
275
506
22

Cold worked
twisted steel bar
460
506

12

12

D = diameter of the bar.


Note: In case of no significant yield point, the yield stress can be considered
the stress at total elongation equal to 0.5% of the gauge length, or the
proof stress for elongation 0.2%.

Table 1.2

Classification and mechanical properties according to ISO 6935-2.


Steel grade
RB 300
RB 400
RB 400W
RB 500
RB 500W

Upper yield stress Tensile strength Rm


2
2
N/mm
Reff N/mm
300
330
24
400
440
500

550

Elongation A5.65 %
16
14

Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with
14Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Classification and mechanical properties according to DIN 488-1.

Reinforcing
steel grade

Table 1.3

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

2
BSt 420 S
III S
1.0428
Reinforcing steel
bar

3
BSt 500 S
IV S
1.0438
Reinforcing
steel bar

4
2)
BSt 500 M
IV N
1.0466
Reinforcing
steel fabric2)

Nominal diameter ds mm
5
Yield strenggth Re (s) ) or 0.2 % proof
stress R p0.2 (0.2) 5)
N/mm2
Tensile strength
5)
2
Rm (z )
N/mm
Elongation after fracture
A10 (10) 5) %
Fatigue strength
N/mm2
7
straight bars )
amplitude
2A(2x106)
Bent bars
2A(2x106)
a
Straight bars taken from 2A(2.106)
5
fabric, with weld point 2A(2.10 )
6 to 12
Bend mandrel diameter,
In mm, in rebend test for
14 and 16
Nominal diameter ds, in
20 to 28
mm
Bend mandrel diameter, in mm, in rebend
test at the weld point
Shear force of the joint S N
Permissible minus
deviation from the
%
8)
nominal cross section As
Relative rib area fR

6 to 28
420

6 to 28
500

4 to 12
500

5.0

5006)

5506)

5506)

5.0

10

10

5.0

215

215

10.0

170
5 ds
6ds
8ds

170
5ds
6ds
8ds

100
200
-

10.0
10.0
10.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

6ds

5.0

0.3 x As x Rs

5.0

5.0

See DIN
488 Part 2
0,22 (0,24)
0,050
(0,055)
0,050
(0,055)
0,012
(0,013)
E, MAG, GP
RA, RP

See DIN 488


Part 4
0,15 (0,17)
0,050 (0,055)

0,050 (0,055)

0,012 (0,013)

Abbreviation
Symbol 1)
Material number
Product form

Chemical composition in the


cast analysis and product
9)
analysis ,
% by mass, maximum

0,050 (0,055)

19
20

C
P

See DIN 488


Part 2
0,22 (0,24)
0,050 (0,055)

10)

11)

Suitability for welding by processes

0,012 (0,013)
E, MAG, GP
RA, RP

5
Value
P3)
%

4)

12)

12)

E , MAG ,
RP

The mandrel diameter to be used for the bend and rebend test varies as shown in the
following tables:

7 02 01 02

Mandrel Diameter and Angle of Bending

Table 2.1 Mandrel diameter and angle of bending according to 2 (*D=dia bar)

Diameter of mandrel of bend


Property

Angle of
bending

Cold bending

180

Rebending

45

Ordinary
tensile steel

High tensile
steel

Cold worked
twisted steel

2D

3D

3D

2D
25

5D

5D
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Table 2.2

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Mandrel diameter (mm) for bend test according to ISO 6935-2.


Nominal diameter 1) of bar
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
32
40
Steel grade
12,5 16
20
32
50
63
100
125
160
RB 300
RB 400
16
20
25
40
63
80
125
160
200
RB 400W
RB 500
20
25
32
50
80
100
160
200
250
RB 500W
1) for nominal diameters larger than 40 mm, the mandrel diameter in bend tests shall be
agreed between manufacturer and purchaser

Table 2.3

Mandrel diameter (mm) for rebend test according to ISO 6935-2.

Nominal diameter 1 ) of bar


Steel grade
RB 400
RB 400W
RB 500
RB 500W

10

12

16

20

25

32

40

32

40

50

63

100

160

200

320

400

Angle of bending between 160 and 180 degree for the bend test, for the
rebend test 90 degree before heating and 20 degree for rebend.

For the mandrel diameter according to DIN 488 see Table 1.3.

7 02 01 03
Table 3.2

Dimensions and Masses


Dimensions, masses and tolerances acc. to ISO 6935-1 - Plain Bars
Nominal
bar
diameter

Nominal crosssectional area

mm

mm

6
8
10
12
16
20

28.3
50.3
78.5
113
201
314

Mass per length


Requirement
kg/m
0.222
0.395
260.617
0.888
1.58
2.47

1) Permissible deviation refers to a single bar.

Permissible
2)
deviation

%
8
8
5
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
5
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
5

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

.
Table 3.3

Dimensions, masses and tolerances acc. to ISO 6935-2 - Ribbed Bars.

Nominal
bar
1)
diameter
mm

Nominal crosssectional area

6
8
10
12
16
20
25
32
40

28.3
50.3
78.5
113
201
314
491
804
1256

mm

Mass per length


Requirement

kg/m
0.222
0.395
0.617
0.888
1.58
2.47
3,85
6,31
9,86

Permissible
2)
deviation

%
8
8
5
5
5
5
4
4
4

1) if diameters larger than 40 mm are required, the size


increase should be in increments of 5 mm. Permissible
deviation on such bars is 4 %.
2) Permissible deviation refers to a single bar.

27
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

7 02 01 04
Table 4.1

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Chemical Composition
Chemical composition according to 2

Maximum Permitted Percentage

Table 4.2

Types of Bars

Carbon
%

Sulphur
%

Phosphorus
%

Hot rolled, ordinary tensile steel bars

0.30

0.05

0.05

Hot rolled, high tensile steel bars

0.33

0.05

0.05

Cold worked, high tensile steel bars

0.25

0.05

0.05

Chemical composition according to ISO 6935-2.

Steel grade
RB 300
RB 400
RB 500
RB 400w
RB 500w

1)

2)

1)

Si

Mn

0,060
(0,070)

0,060
(0,070)

0,22
3)
(0,24)

0,60
(0,65)

1,60
(1,70)

0,050
(0,055)

0,050
(0,055)

0,012
(0,013)

0,50
(0,52)

Ceq

for RB 400W and RB 500W with diameters larger than 32 mm, the maximum
carbon content (c) is 0,25 % (0,27) %) and the maximum carbon equivalent (Ceq) is

0,55 % (0,57 %).

A higher nitrogen content may be used if sufficient quantities of nitrogen binding


elements are present.
3) The value in bracket apply for the product analysis.

For the chemical composition according to DIN 488 see Table 1.3.
ASTM A 615M limits the content of phosphorus only: 0.06 %

7 02 02

Steel Fabric

7 02 02 01
Composition

Classification, Mechanical Properties and Chemical


The minimum mechanical properties of reinforcing steel fabric in accordance with 224
shall be as follows:
high strength steel wires proof stress not less than

420 N/mm2

ultimate tensile strength not less than

500 N/mm2

mild steel yield stress not less than

240 N/mm2

ultimate tensile strength not less than

370 N/mm2

28
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

The percentage of phosphorus and sulphur shall not exceed 0.06 %.


The percentage of nitrogen shall not exceed 0.01 %, or 0.012% if phosphorus does
not exceed 0.05%.
The minimum mechanical properties and the chemical composition of reinforcing steel
fabric in accordance with ISO 6935-3 shall comply with the product analysis
requirements of
- ISO 10544 for cold reduced wires
- ISO 6935-1 for plain bars
- ISO 6935-2 for ribbed bars.
The minimum mechanical properties and the chemical composition of reinforcing steel
fabric in accordance with DIN 488-4 are shown in Table 1.3.

7 02 02 02

Dimensions and Masses

Dimensions, masses and tolerances shall conform to the following tables:


Table 5.1.1

Dimensions and masses according to 224.

Nominal bar
diameter

Nominal crosssectional area

mm

mm

4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0

12.6
15.9
19.6
23.8
28.3
33.2
38.5
44.2
50.3
56.7
63.6
70.9
78.5
86.6
95.0
103.9
113.1

Nominal mass
of metre length

Kg.
0.099
0.125
0.154
0.187
0.222
0.260
0.302
0.347
0.395
0.445
0.499
0.556
0.617
0.680
0.746
0.815
0.888

29
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Cross sectional area


of wire,
cm2

Cross sectional area of fabric in meter length according to 224.

Nominal diameter of
wire,
mm

Table 5.1.2

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0

0.126
0.159
0.196
0.238
0.283
0.332
0.385
0.442
0.503
0.567
0.636
0.709
0.785
0.866
0.950
1.039
1.131

50

Distance between wire centres f (single fabric) mm.


75
100
150
200
250
300
350

400

Distance between wire centres (double wire fabric), mm


100
2.52
3.18
3.93
4.75
5.65
6.64
7.70
8.84
10.05
11.35
12.72
14.18
15.71
17.32
19.01
20.77
22.62

150
1.68
2.12
2.62
3.17
3.77
4.43
5.13
5.89
6.70
7.57
8.48
9.45
10.47
11.55
12.67
13.85
15.08

1.26
1.59
1.96
2.38
2.82
3.32
3.85
4.42
5.03
5.67
6.36
7.09
7.85
8.66
9.50
10.39
11.31

0.84
1.06
1.31
1.58
1.88
2.21
2.57
2.95
3.35
3.78
4.24
4.73
5.24
5.77
6.34
6.92
7.54

0.63
0.80
0.98
1.19
1.41
1.66
1.92
2.20
2.51
2.84
3.18
3.54
3.92
4.33
4.74
5.19
5.66

0.50
0.64
0.78
0.95
1.13
1.33
1.54
1.77
2.01
2.27
2.54
2.83
3.14
3.46
3.80
4.15
4.52

0.42
0.53
0.65
0.79
0.94
1.11
1.28
1.47
1.67
1.89
2.11
2.36
2.61
2.88
3.15
3.45
3.76

0.36
0.45
0.56
0.68
0.81
0.95
1.10
1.26
1.44
1.62
1.82
2.03
2.24
2.47
2.72
2.97
3.23

0.32
0.40
0.49
0.59
0.71
0.83
0.96
1.10
1.26
1.42
1.59
1.77
1.96
2.17
2.38
2.60
2.83

Nominal mass of
metre length of wire,
kg/m

Nominal masses of square meter of fabric according to 224.

Nominal diameter of
wire,
mm

Table 5.1.3

Cross sectional area of wires per metre length of fabric, cm2/m

4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0

0.099
0.125
0.154
0.187
0.222
0.260
0.302
0.347
0.395
0.445
0.499
0.556
0.617
0.680
0.746
0.815
0.888

Nominal mass of wires in the same direction per square metre of fabric, kg/m2
Distance between wire centres (single fabric), mm.
100
150
200
250
300
350

50

75

100
1.97
2.50
3.08
3.73
4.44
5.21
6.04
6.94
7.89
8.91
9.99
11.13
12.23
13.59
14.92
16.31
17.76

150
1.32
1.66
2.06
2.49
2.96
3.47
4.03
4.62
5.26
5.94
6.66
7.42
8.22
9.06
9.95
10.87
11.84

400

Distance between wire centres (double wire fabric), mm


0.99
1.25
1.54
1.87
2.22
2.60
3.02
3.47
3.95
4.45
4.99
5.59
6.17
6.80
7.46
8.15
8.88

0.66
0.83
1.03
1.24
1.48
1.74
2.01
2.31
2.63
2.97
3.33
3.71
4.11
4.53
4.97
5.44
5.92

0.49
0.62
0.77
0.93
1.11
1.30
1.51
1.73
1.97
2.23
2.50
2.78
3.08
3.40
3.73
4.08
4.44

0.39
0.50
0.62
0.75
0.89
1.04
1.21
1.39
1.58
1.78
2.00
2.23
2.47
2.72
2.98
3.26
3.55

0.33
0.42
0.51
0.62
0.74
0.87
1.01
1.16
1.37
1.48
1.66
1.85
2.06
2.27
2.49
2.72
2.96

0.28
0.36
0.44
0.53
0.63
0.74
0.86
0.99
1.13
1.27
1.43
1.59
1.76
1.94
2.13
2.33
2.54

0.25
0.31
0.39
0.47
0.56
0.65
0.76
0.87
0.99
1.11
1.25
1.39
1.54
1.70
1.87
2.04
2.22

30
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Table 5.1.4

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Tolerances according to 224.

Length of fabric
Up to 6 m
Over 6 m

Tolerance on width
25 mm
25 mm

Tolerance on length
25 mm
1%

The joints at the intersections of longitudinal and transverse wires shall be firm welded
or interwoven or clipped by sound and uniform process.
According to ISO 6935-3 the steel fabric shall be made of either
-cold reduced wires with nominal diameters in the range from 4 mm to 16 mm and
with mass and geometry complying with ISO 10544;
or
-plain bars with nominal diameters of 6, 8, 10, 12 or 16 mm and with mass complying
with ISO 6935-1;
or
-ribbed bars with nominal diameters of 6, 8, 10, 12 or 16 mm and with mass and
geometry complying with ISO 6935-2.
Resistance welding of the joints at all intersections of longitudinal and transverse wires
is stipulated to provide shear resistant connections.
The size, cross-sectional area and mass of wires for reinforcing steel fabric and
reinforcing steel wire together with dimensions of oblique ribs and relative rib area for
fabric according to DIN 488-4 are shown in Table 5.2.

31
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Table 5.2

1
Nominal
size ds

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Dimensions and masses for steel fabric (ribbed bars) acc. to DIN 488-2.

2
Nominal
cross
sectional
area1)
As
Cm2

3
Nominal
mass2)
G
Kg/m

5
6
7
Oblique ribs (guideline values)
Height
Height
At the
Crest
Rib
In the middle
quarter
width
spacin
3)
points
b
g c4)
h
h1/4
h3/4

4.0
0.126
0.099
4.0
0.30
0.24
4.5
0.159
0.125
5.0
0.196
0.154
0.32
0.26
5.5
0.238
0.187
0.40
0.32
5.0
6.0
0.283
0.222
6.5
0.332
0.260
0.46
0.37
7.0
0.385
0.302
7.5
0.442
0.347
~0.1xds
0.55
0.44
6.0
8.0
0.503
0.395
8.5
0.567
0.445
9.0
0.636
0.499
9.5
0.709
0.556
0.75
0.60
7.0
10.0
0.785
0.617
10.5
0.866
0.680
11.0
0.950
0.746
8.4
0.97
0.77
11.5
1.039
0.815
12.0
1.131
0.888
Dimensionless quantity,
see DIN 488 part 1, September 1984 edition, table 1 (line 14 and footnote 8).
Calculated taking the density as 7,85 kg/m3.
Crest widths at mid-rib up to 0,2.ds shall not give grounds for complaint.
Permissible deviation: 15 %.

8
Relative rib
area fR*)

0.036
0.039

0.045

0.052

0.056

Resistance welding of the joints at the intersections of longitudinal and


transverse wires is stipulated to provide shear resistant connections.

7 02 03

Steel Wire

7 02 03 01

Classification, Mechanical Properties and Chemical Composition


For the specification of steel wire in accordance with 224 see item 7.2.2 Steel Fabric.
ISO 10544 specifies technical requirements for cold reduced steel wire designed for
the reinforcement of concrete or for use in welded fabric, and defines one steel grade:
500 N/mm2.
The minimum mechanical properties and the chemical composition of reinforcing steel
wire in accordance with ISO 10544 are shown in the Tables 6.1 and 6.2.

32
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Table 6.1

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Mechanical properties according to ISO 10544.

Proof stress Rp0,2


2
N/mm

Tensile strength Rm
2
N/mm

500

550

1)

Elongation
A5,65
%
12

1) By agreement between purchaser and supplier, a total elongation at


maximum force (Agt) of 2,0 % shall be used instead of A5.65

Table 6.2

Chemical composition according to ISO 10544.

Si

Mn

0,22
2)
(0,24)

0,60
(0,65)

1,60
(1,70)

0,050
(0,055)

0,050
(0,055)

1)

0,012
(0,013)

Ceq
0,50
(0,52)

1) A higher nitrogen content may be used if sufficient quantities of nitrogen binding


elements are present.
2) The value in bracket apply for the product analysis.

Table 6.3
STANDARD

BS 4449/97

GRADE

GR.250

SHAPE

Plain Bars
Plain Coils

GR. 460 B
Deformed Bars

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
TS KG/mm2

> = 1.15 YS

> = 1.08 YS

YS KG/mm2

MIN. 25.3 (250 N /MM2 )

MIN. 46.9 (460 N /MM2 )

EL %

Min . 22 (220 N /MM2 )

Min . 14(140 N /MM2 )

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
C%

33
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

S%

Max , 250

Max , 250

P%

Max , 060

Max , 050

Mn %

Max , 060

Max , 050

< = 120 PPM

< = 120 PPM

< = 0.42 %

< = 0.51 %

N%
Ceq %

# Ceq = % C+ % Mn / 6 + % ( Cr + Mo + V ) / 5 + % ( Ni + Cu ) / 15

7 02 03 02

Dimensions and Masses

For the specification of steel wire in accordance with 224 see item 7.2.2 Steel Fabric.
Nominal
wire
diameter
mm
5
6
7
8
9
10
12

Nominal
crosssectional
area
2
mm
19.6
28.3
38.5
50.3
63.6
78.5
113,1

Mass divided by length


Permissible
1)
deviation

Requirement
kg/m

%
9
8
8
8
5
5
5

0.154
0.222
0.302
0.395
0.499
0.617
0.888

1) Refers to a single wire.

Dimensions, masses and tolerances according to ISO 10544 shall conform to table 6.3:
Table 6.3

Dimensions and masses according to ISO 10544.

Nominal size

Batch

Individual bar

All sizes

+4 to 2 %

+6 to 2 %

BS 4482 and DIN 488 specify technical requirements for cold reduced steel wire equal
or at least similar to ISO 10544.
ASTM A 496 specifies deformed steel wire, which has been cold worked. Dimensions
and masses differ from those of , ISO, BSI and DIN due to the conversion from InchPound Units into SI Units.

34
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

7 02 04

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Reinforcing Steel for Prestressed Concrete


This item does not particularize prestressing steel. It only gives some general
information. For details see ISO 6934, ASTM A 416, ASTM A 722, BS 4486, BS 5896,
DIN 4227, DIN 1045 and ACI 318.
The hereafter given basic information applies to the following standard bars and
strands used for prestressed concrete:
- Cold-worked high-tensile alloy steel bars
- Steel wire for prestressed concrete
- Seven-wire steel strands
All other prestressing steel members used in prestressed concrete, but being subject
to special techniques, are not prescribed under this item.

7 02 04 01

Cold-worked High-tensile Alloy Steel Bars for Prestressed Concrete


The hereafter specified requirements apply to plain round alloy steel bar tendons,
which are prepared from hot-rolled steel bars by cold working.

Threads
The steel shall be hot-rolled into bars and subsequently processed to give the required
mechanical properties. Where the bars are threaded, the threads shall be cold-rolled
to the required tolerances.
Surface Condition
All bars shall be well and cleanly rolled and shall be sound and free from harmful
surface defects. Until the bars are built-in the contractor shall give adequate protection
to:
(1) prevent corrosion and damage to threaded ends;
(2) prevent corrosion to all bars
Welding
Production lengths shall contain no welds. All bars shall be protected at all stages of
handling from the effects of local heat, whether by weld-splash or other accidental
means.
This material shall not be subjected to any subsequent welding operations.
Tolerances
Where bars are ordered and supplied by mass, the mass of finished bar tendons shall
vary from the mass calculated on the nominal diameter by not more than the
tolerances.

7 02 04 02

Seven-wire Steel Strand for Prestressed Concrete


The hereunder specified requirements apply to strands, which are made by cold-drawn
wires, manufactured from patented plain carbon steel.
Stranding Process
The strand shall comprise seven wires with a center wire at least 2 % greater in
nominal diameter than the surrounding wires. The latter shall be tightly laid around the
center wire.
Joints
35
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

No length of strand shall be joined to another length of strand by welding, brazing,


splicing, or any other method.
Straightness
The treated strand shall be reformed into coils or wound on to reels, having a core
diameter of sufficient size, and in any case, not less than 600 mm diameter, to ensure
that the strand shall pay off reasonably straight.
The wires shall be suitably formed during the stranding operation so that they will not
unravel when the strand is cut.
Surface Condition
Unless otherwise indicated, the finished strand shall not be coated with any lubricant,
oil or other matter to a degree likely to impair adhesion to concrete.
A colour code identification of low relaxation strand is permissible provided the surface
area affected by the marking is an insignificant proportion of the total surface of the
strand in the coil.
Specification
Prestressed tendons shall be enumerated stating their length, number of wires,
ultimate strength and size of wires, type of core and sheathing.
Descriptions shall state whether tendons are for pre-tensioned or post-tensioned
members.
Descriptions shall state whether tendons are for pre-tensioned or post-tensioned
members.
Anchorages shall be enumerated stating their components.

7 03 Execution
The following design requirements are excerpts of or at least similar to ACI 318
(Tables and sketches ACI 315 (part C)) and have to be observed in the course of
preparation of the working drawings.
For equivalent design requirements see DIN 1045.

7 03 01

Standard Hook
A standard hook shall mean either:
- a 180-degree bend plus an extension of at least four bar diameters but not less than
70 mm at the free end of the bar; or
- a 90-degree bend plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free end of
the bar; or
-

for stirrups and tie anchorages only either a 90-degree or a 135-degree turn plus
an extension of at least six bar diameters but not less than 70 mm at the free end
of the bar.

Minimum Bend Diameter


The internal bend diameter of standard hooks shall not be less than the values of the
following table:

36
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Bar diameter in mm

Minimum bend diameter

10 through 25
28 through 34
36 and more

6 bar diameters
8 bar diameters
10 bar diameters

A standard hook having an internal bend diameter greater than 10 times bar diameter
shall be regarded as a straight extension of the bar for the purpose of development of
tensile stress.

7 03 02

Stirrups and Tie Hooks and Bends other than


Standard Hooks:
Bar diameter in mm

Minimum bend diameter

10
12
16

Not less than 38


Not less than 50
Not less than 65

Inside diameter of bends for stirrups and ties shall not be less than
Bends for all other bars shall have diameters on the inside of the bar not less than
Minimum clear spacing in parallel bars
1
2
3
4
5
Bars between which
Direction in which
Minimum clear spacing or pitch
clear spacing is
spacing is measured shall be the greatest value of
measured
a) Horizontal bars in
Horizontally
25 mm
1.0 d
1.5 M.N.S
beams
Vertically
25 mm
1.0 d
b) ) Horizontal bars
Horizontally
50 mm
3.0 d
1.5 M.N.S
in slabs, walls
Vertically
25 mm
1.0 d
c) Vertical bars
Horizontally
40 mm
1.5 d
1.5 M.N.S
d) Bars in ribs of
Horizontally
15 mm
1.0 d
1.5 M.N.S
hollow-block or
concrete-joist slab
constr.
allowed in item 7.3.1.

7 03 03

Spacing of Reinforcement
Minimum Clear Spacing of Parallel Bars
The clear distance between two parallel reinforcing bars or bundles of bars shall not
be less than the greatest of the dimensions given in columns 3, 4, and 5 of the
following table:
M.N.S. = the maximum nominal size of the aggregates
The clear distance specified above shall apply also between a splice and an adjacent
parallel bar or other splice.

37
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

Minimum Clear Spacing of Horizontal Bars in Layers


If horizontal bars are arranged in two or more layers close together, the above-mentioned spacing shall apply to the horizontal clear distance between any two bars,
irrespective of whether the bars are in the same layer or not.
Maximum Center-to-centre Spacing of Parallel Bars
The center-to-centre spacing of parallel bars shall be not greater than 300 mm or 2 h
(h = thickness of member), whichever is lower.
Bundled Bars
Bundling of bars needs the approval in writing by the Engineer. If bundling is allowed,
bundled bars shall comply with ACI 318 (7.6.6) and as detailed in ACI 315.

7 03 04

Splices of Reinforcement

7 03 04 01

General
For the use and application of
- Lap Splices
- Mechanical Connections
- Welded Splices
see ACI 318 (12.14).

7 03 04 02

Splices of Deformed Bars and Deformed Wire in Tension


For the use and application see ACI 318 (12.15).

7 03 04 03

Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression


For the use and application see ACI 318 (12.16).

7 03 04 04

Special Splice Requirements for Columns


For the use and application see ACI 318 (12.17).

7 03 04 0 5

Splices of Welded Deformed Wire Fabric in Tension


For the use and application see ACI 318 (12.18).

7 03 04 06

Splices of Welded Plain Wire Fabric in Tension


For the use and application see ACI 318 (12.19).

7 03 05

Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement


Reinforcement for shrinkage and temperature stresses normal to flexural
reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with ACI 318 (7.12).

38
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03250 Expansion Control

Division

03 - Concrete

Section

03250 - EXPANSION CONTROL

Part 1:

General

1.01

Scope

These specifications cover the requirements for expansion control and providing extruded aluminum
expansion joints where indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. The Contractor shall be
responsible for provision of a complete expansion control system to meet the movement requirement
stated on the drawings, details of which are to be submitted for approval by the Supervising Engineer.

1.02

System Description

Expansion control shall be a system that can provide for floor-to-floor, floor to wall, and wall and ceiling;
including cross connections, closures, transitions and accessories to be a complete system.
System shall be of extruded aluminum and an elastomeric joint sealer to permit free movement of joint.

1.03

References

At least version of the publications listed below from apart of the specifications, unless otherwise
specified. The publications are, referred to in the text with the basic designations only:
American Society for testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM B 209

Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM B 221
Shapes and Tubes

Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire

ASTM D 412

Test for Rubber Properties in Tension Federal


Specifications (FS)

FS QQ-A-200/9C(1)

Aluminum Alloy Bar, Rod, Shapes, Tube and Wire,


Extruded, 6063

FS QQ-A-250/11E

Aluminum Alloy 6061, Plate and Sheet

FS TT-S-00227E

Sealing compound, Elastomeric Type, MultiComponent (for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in
Buildings and other Structures).

1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

Part 2:

PRODUCTS

2.01

Materials

2.01.01

Material

ODAC
Section 03250 Expansion Control

0.1 Metal extruded aluminum conforming to ASTM B221.


0.2 Elastomer: Polyurethane conforming ASTM TT-S00227E.

2.01.02

Finish

Aluminum concealed surfaces: Zinc chromate prime coat or the approved coating.
Aluminum exposed surfaces: Clear anodized, satin brush aluminum, or hard coat anodized aluminum, as
selected by the Architect.
Elastomers: Color as selected by the Architect.
Exposed surfaces shall have a strippable protective coat when delivered, and shall not be removed until
directed.

2.01.03

Fire Barrier system

Provide prefabricated fire barrier assemblies tested in accordance with ANSI/UL 263 procedures for one
and two hour classification, unless otherwise detailed and in compliance with ASTM E119 and NFPA #
251 procedures.
Material shall carry UL label and be subject to underwriters Laboratories follow-UP system for quality
assurance.

2.02

Fabrication

2.02.01

Housing

Formed as to provide positive interlocking of the Elastomer into the extrusion.

2.02.02

Elastomeric strips

Of adequate width to completely fill the assigned space.

2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (03) Concrete

ODAC
Section 03250 Expansion Control

Part 3:

EXECUTION

3.01

Installation/Application/Erection
0.1 Install expansion joint covers in accordance with the manufactures approved shop
drawings and printed instructions.
0.2 Set anchored components into bedding material so that when cover is installed, it
is flush with floor finish. Clean out joint prior to installation.
0.3 Intersection of vertical and horizontal sections of cover: Only sufficient clearance to
allow for movement without rubbing.

3.01

Adjusting and Cleaning

When directed, remove strippable protective coat.

3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Division

03 - Concrete

Section

03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

Part 1:

General

1 01

Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all plant, labor and materials and
performing all operations in connection with plain and reinforced Cast-In-Place Concrete.
These requirements shall apply but not be limited to furnishing concrete for the following:
- Foundations
- Isolated footings
- Retaining walls
- Slabs on grade
- Suspended floor and roof slabs
- Walls
- Columns and beams

1 01 01

Section includes
01.0 Structural Concrete
02.0 Architectural Concrete
03.0 Prestressed Concrete
04.0 Mass concrete
05.0 Concrete Accessories
06.0 Concrete Restoration and Cleaning

1 01 04

Related Sections
02200 Earthworks
02500 Paving and Surfacing
03100 Concrete Formwork
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
03400 Precast Concrete
04200 Unit Masonry
07100 Waterproofing
07900 Joint Sealers

1 02

References

1 02 01

Applicable Standards

1 02 01 03

International Standards

1 02 01 03 01

International Standard Organization (ISO)


ISO 565: 90

Test sieves - Metal wire cloth, perforated metal plate and


electroformed sheet - Nominal sizes of openings.

ISO 679: 89

Methods of testing cements - Determination of strength.


1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

ISO 680: 90

Cement - Test methods - Chemical analysis.

ISO 1920: 76

Concrete tests - Dimensions, tolerances, applicability of test


specimens.

ISO 2194: 91

Industrial screens - Woven wire cloth, perforated plate and


electroformed sheet - Designation and nominal sizes of
openings.

ISO 2736

Test specimens

ISO 2736-1: 86

Part 1: Sampling of fresh concrete.

ISO 2736-2: 86

Part 2: Making and curing of test specimens for strength tests.

ISO 4012: 78

Concrete - Determination of compressive strength of test


specimens.

1 02 01 04

USA Standards

1 02 01 04 01

American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)


ASTM A 167: 96

Standard Specification for Stainless and


Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.

ASTM B 370: 98

Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building


Construction.

ASTM C 33: 99

Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

ASTM C 40: 98

Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates


for Concrete.

ASTM C 87: 83(95) Standard Test Method for Effect of Organic Impurities in
Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar.
ASTM C 88: 99

Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of


Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.

ASTM C 94: 98

Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

ASTM C 109/M: 99 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic


Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens).
ASTM C 117: 95

Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 0.075 mm


(No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

ASTM C 123: 98

Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate.

ASTM C 127: 88

Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of


Coarse Aggregate.

ASTM C 128: 97

Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of


Fine Aggregate.

ASTM C 131: 96

Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of


Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the
Los Angeles Machine.

ASTM C 136: 96a

Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse


Aggregates.

ASTM C 142: 97

Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in


Aggregates.

ASTM C 143: 98

Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

ASTM C 144

Standard Specifications for Aggregate for Masonry mortar

ASTM C 150: 98

Standard Specification for Portland Cement.


2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

ASTM C 156: 98

Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing


Materials.

ASTM C 171: 97a

Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

ASTM C172

Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C173

Standard test method for air content of freshly mixed concrete by


the volumetric method

ASTM C 185: 99

Standard Test Method for Air Content of Hydraulic Cement


Mortar.

ASTM C 188: 95

Standard Test Method for Density of Hydraulic Cement.

ASTM C 191: 99

Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement


by Vicat Needle.

ASTM C231
t

Standard test method for air content of freshly mixed concrete by


he pressure method

ASTM C232

Standard test method for bleeding of concrete

ASTM C 260: 98

Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for


Concrete.

ASTM C 289: 94

Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of


Aggregates (Chemical Method).

ASTM C 309: 98a

Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming


Compound for Curing Concrete.

ASTM C 330: 99

Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for


Structural Concrete.

ASTM C 332: 87

Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for


Insulating Concrete.

ASTM C 494: 98a

Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

ASTM C 535: 96

Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of


Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the
Los Angeles Machine.

ASTM C 567: 99a

Standard Test Method for Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight


Concrete.

ASTM D 75: 97

Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.

ASTM D 226: 97a

Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used


in Roofing and Waterproofing.

ASTM D 994: 98

Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for


Concrete (Bituminous Type).

ASTM D 1056: 98

Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge


or Expanded Rubber.

ASTM D 1190: 97

Standard Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer (Hot-Poured


Elastic Type).

ASTM D 1667: 97

Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed Cell Form).

ASTM D 1751: 97

Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for


Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and
Resilient Types).

3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

1 02 01 04 02

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

ASTM D 1752: 84

Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork


Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction.

ASTM D 4397: 96

Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for


Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.

ASTM E 11: 95

Standard Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing


Purposes.

ASTM E 96: 95

Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of


Materials in Sheet Form.

ASTM E 154: 99

Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in


Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as
Ground Cover.

ASTM E 337: 84

Standard Test Methods for Measuring Humidity with a Psychro


meter (the Measurement of Wet-Bulb and Dry-Bulb
Temperatures).

ASTMC403

Standard test method for time of setting of concrete mixtures by


penetration resistance

ASTM C595

Standard Specifications for Blended Hydraulic Cement

ASTM C685

Standard Specifications for Concrete Made By Volumetric


Batching and Continuous Mixing

ASTM C684

Standard test method for making, accelerated curing, and testing


concrete compression test specimens

ACI 318

Building code requirements for reinforced concrete

American Concrete Institute (ACI)


ACI 116R: 90

Cement and Concrete Terminology.

ACI 121R: 85

Quality Assurance Systems for Concrete Construction.

ACI 211.1: 91

Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,


Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.

ACI 211.2: 98

Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural


Lightweight Concrete.

ACI 211.4R: 93

Guide for Selecting Proportions for High-Strength Concrete with


Portland Cement and Fly Ash.

ACI 212.3R: 91

Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

ACI 212.4R: 93

Guide for the Use of High-Range Water-Reducing Admixtures


(Superplasticizers) in Concrete.

ACI 214: 77

Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results


of Concrete (1989).

ACI 214.1R: 81

Use of Accelerated Strength Testing (1986).

ACI 214.3R: 88

Simplified Version of the Recommended Practice for Evaluation


of Strength Test Results.

ACI 224.1R: 93

Causes, Evaluations and Repair of Cracks in Concrete


Structures

ACI 224.2R: 92

Cracking of Concrete Members in Direct Tension

ACI 301: 96

Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete.

ACI 302.1R: 96

Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.


4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

1 02 01 04 04
(AASHTO)

ACI 303R: 91

Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete Practice.

ACI 303.1: 97

Standard Specification for Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete.

ACI 304R: 89

Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing


Concrete.

ACI 304.2R: 96

Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.

ACI 304.3R: 96

Heavyweight Concrete: Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and


Placing.

ACI 304.4R: 95

Placing Concrete by Belt Conveyors.

ACI 304.5R: 91

Batching, Mixing, and Job Control of Lightweight Concrete.

ACI 304.6R: 91

Guide for the Use of Volumetric-Measuring and ContinuousMixing Concrete Equipment.

ACI 305R: 91

Hot weather Concreting.

ACI 308: 92

Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.

ACI 309R: 96

Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.

ACI 309.1R: 93

Behavior of Fresh Concrete During Vibration.

ACI 309.2R: 90

Identification and Control of Consolidation-Related Surface


Defects in Formed Concrete.

ACI 309.3R: 92

Guide to Consolidation of Concrete in Congested Areas.

ACI 358.1R: 92

Analysis and Design of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete


Guideway Structures.

ACI 372R: 97

Design and Construction of Circular Wire and Strand Wrapped


Prestressed Concrete Structures.

ACI 373R: 97

Design and Construction of Circular Prestressed Concrete


Structures with Circumferential Tendons.

ACI 423.3R: 96

Recommendations for Concrete Members Prestressed with


Unbonded Tendons.

ACI 517.2R: 87

Accelerated Curing of Concrete at Atmospheric PressureState of the Art.

American Association of Highway and Transportation Officials


AASHTO T 26: 79

1 02 01 05

1 02 01 06

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be used in


Concrete.

European Standards
ENV 206-1: 00

Concrete Part 1: Specification, Performance, Production,and


Conformity.

EN 480: 97

Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout - Test methods


Part 1 to 12 (series)

British Standards
BSI 812

Testing aggregates Part 2, .100 . 124 (24 Parts - 1984 . 1998).

BSI 882: 92

Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete.

BSI 1881

Testing concrete Part 5, 101 . 209 (39 Parts - 1970 . 1998).

BSI 3148: 80

Methods of test for water for making concrete (incl. notes on


the suitability of the water).
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

1 02 01 07

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

BSI 3837

Expanded polystyrene boards.

BSI 3837-1: 86

Specification for boards manufactured from expandable beads.

BSI 3837-2: 90

Specification for extruded boards.

BSI 3927: 86

Specification for rigid phenolic foam (PF) for thermal insulation


in the form of slabs and profiled sections.

BSI 8110

Structural use of concrete.

BSI 8110-3: 85

Design charts for singly reinforced beams, doubly reinforced


beams, and rectangular columns.

German Standards
DIN 1045: 88

Structural Use of Concrete - Design and Construction.

DIN 1045/A1: 96

Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Design and Construction;


Alterations

DIN 1045-1: 97

Concrete, Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Structures


Part 1: Design

DIN 1048

Testing Concrete.

DIN 1048-1: 91

Testing of fresh Concrete


DIN 1048-2: 91 Testing of hardened Concrete
(Specimen taken in situ).

DIN 1048-4: 91

Test Methods for Concrete, Determination of the


CompressiveStrength in hardened Concrete in Structures and
Components; Application of Reference lines and Evaluation with
special Methods.

DIN 1084

Control (Quality Control) of Concrete Structures and Reinforced


Concrete Structures.

DIN 1084-1: 78

Concrete B II on Building Sites.

DIN 1164-1: 94

Cement Part 1: Composition, Specifications.

DIN 1164-2: 96

Cement Part 2: Attestation of Conformity .

DIN 4030

Assessment of Water, Soil and Gases for their Aggressiveness


to Concrete.

DIN 4030-1: 91

Principles and Limiting Values.

DIN 4030-2: 91

Collection and Examination of Water and Soil Samples.

DIN 4226

Aggregates for concrete.

DIN 4226-1: 83

Aggregates of dense structure (heavy aggregates)Terminology,


designation and requirements.

DIN 4226-2: 83

Aggregates of porous structure (lightweight aggregates)Terminology, designation and requirements.

DIN 4226-3: 83

Testing of heavy and lightweight aggregates.

DIN 4226-4: 83

Inspection.

DIN 18161-1: 76

Cork products as insulation materials for construction. Thermal


insulating material.

DIN 18164

Rigid cellular plastics insulating building materials.

DIN 18164-1: 92

Thermal insulating materials.

DIN 18164-2: 91

Polystyrene foam impact sound insulating materials.


6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

DIN 52114: 88

1 02 02

1 02 03

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Determination of flakiness index of mineral aggregates using


a granulometric gauge.

Codes
ACI 318M/RM : 92

Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and


Commentary.

ACI 318R : 95

Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and


Commentary.

BSI 8110-1 : 97

Code of practice for design and construction.

BSI 8110-2 : 85

Code of practice for special circumstances.

ENV 1992-1-1: 92

Eurocode 2: Design of Concrete Structures - Common unified


rules

ENV 1994-1-1: 94

Eurocode 4: Design of Composite Steel and Concrete


Structures - Common unified rules.

ECC203-2003

Egyptian code of practice for concrete design and construction.

CODE No. (205)

Egyptian code of practice for steel construction and bridges.

CODE No. (202)

Egyptian code of practice for soil mechanics and foundation.

Other References
Portland Cement Association: EB 075 D Concrete floors on ground. Design and
control of concrete mixtures.
European Committee for Concrete/lnternational Federation of Prestressed Concrete:
International recommendations for the design and construction of concrete structures.
FIP 6th Congress, Prague, June 1970. London, Cement and Concrete Association,
1970.

1 03

Definitions
For technical terms and definitions not listed below see: ACI 116.

1 03 01

Technical Terms
Admixtures - substances added to the concrete and which, by chemical or physical
action or by both, modify such properties of the concrete as its workability, hardening,
setting, etc.
Additions - finely ground substances added to modify certain properties of the
concrete, the volumes of which are to be taken into account when designing the mix.
Examples are pozzolana or pigments for producing colored concrete. The term
additives are sometimes used for additions.
Additives - see additions
Architectural concrete - concrete which is exposed to view as an interior or exterior
surface in the completed structure.
Average compressive strength - the strength of a given class of concrete, required to
statistically meeting a designated specific strength.
Batching - proportioning a quantity of either concrete or mortar to be mixed at one time.
Cast-in-place-concrete - concrete that is deposited and allowed to harden in the place
where it is required to be in the complete structure, as opposed to precast concrete.
Characteristic strength - the value of strength below which 5 % of the population of all
possible strength measurements of the specified concrete are expected to fall.
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Compaction - see consolidation


Compressive strength - the compressive strength of concrete is expressed in terms of
the characteristic strength. The strength shall be determined on moulded cube or
cylinder specimens.
Concrete - material formed by mixing cement, coarse and fine aggregate and water,
produced by the hardening of cement paste (cement and water); besides these basic
components, it may also contain admixtures and/or additions (If the maximum particle
size of the aggregate is 4 mm or less, the resulting material is termed mortar, not
concrete).
Consolidation - a process of inducing a closer arrangement of the solid particles in
freshly mixed concrete or mortar, during placement by reduction of voids; usually by
vibration, centrifugation, rodding, tamping, or some combination of these actions.
Construction joint - the surface where two successive placements of concrete meet,
across which it may be desired to achieve bond and through which reinforcement may
be continuous.
Contraction joint - formed, sawed or tooled groove in a concrete structure to create a
weakened plane and to regulate the location of cracking resulting from the dimensional
change of different parts of the structure (see also isolation joint).
Control joints - see contraction joint.
Design strength - nominal strength of a member multiplied by a strength reduction
factor.
Designed mix - mix for which the user is responsible for specifying the required
performance and additional characteristics and the producer is responsible for providing
a mix which complies with the required performance and additional characteristics.
Effective water content - mixing water plus water already present on the surface of the
aggregates and in the admixtures and additions (and possibly water from added ice or
steam heating).
Expansion joint - (1) a separation provided between adjoining parts of a structure to
allow movement where expansion is likely to exceed contraction; (2) a separation
between pavement slabs on grade, filled with a compressible filler material; (3) an
isolation joint intended to allow independent movement between adjoining parts.
Finishing - leveling, smoothing, consolidating, and otherwise treating the surface of
fresh and recently placed concrete or mortar to produce desired appearance and
service.
In-situ concrete - see cast-in-place-concrete.
Isolation joints - a separation between adjoining parts of a concrete structure, usually
a vertical plane, at a designed location such as to interfere least with performance of the
structure, yet such as to allow relative movement in three directions and avoid formation
of cracks elsewhere in the concrete and through which all or part of the bonded
reinforcement is interrupted (see also contraction joint and expansion joint).
Mix designs - see proportioning.
Nominal strength - strength of a member or cross-section calculated in accordance
with provisions and assumptions of the strength design method before application of
any strength reduction (phi) factor.
Placement - the process of placing and consolidating concrete; a quantity of concrete
placed and finished during a continuous operation; inappropriately referred to as
pouring.
Placing - the deposition, distribution and consolidation of freshly mixed concrete in a
place where it is to harden; inappropriately referred to as pouring.
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Precast concrete - concrete cast elsewhere than its final position.


Prescribed mix - mix which the user specifies the composition of the mix and materials
to be used. The producer is responsible for providing the specified mix but is not
responsible for the performance of the concrete.
Proportioning - selection of proportions of ingredients to make the most economical
use of available materials to produce concrete or mortar of the required properties (see:
mix design).
Ready-mixed concrete - concrete manufactured for delivery to a purchaser in a plastic
and unhardened state.
Site mixed concretes - concrete batched and mixed on or near the construction site by
the user.
Water/cement ratio - ratio of effective water content in the concrete.

1 03 02

Abbreviations
B.o.Q.

Bills of Quantities

fc

specified compressive strength of concrete

Q.C.

Quality control

w/c ratio

water/cement ratio

1 04

System Description

1 04 01

Design Requirements
The design and structural analysis - when being part of the Contract - shall be in
accordance with UBC and ACI 318

1 05

Submittals
In compliance with the Conditions of Contract and the provisions of Section 01300 the
following shall be submitted for approval after award of Contract within thirty one (31)
days

1 05 01

Product Data
The product data for each different type or grade of cement, aggregate, mix,
accessory and other product indicated.
After the Engineers review of the design mixes for each class of concrete, the
Contractor shall prepare and test each class of concrete. The Contractor shall prepare
and submit a laboratory mix report to the Engineer on the results of tests ensuring that
the design mixes meet the specifications herein and with the appropriate
recommendations.
The Contractor shall obtain from the Concrete Supplier copies of the results of all
tests, which shall become part of the Contractor's Weekly Quality Control report to the
Engineer.

1 05 01.01

Concrete Mix Design Data


Forty days minimum prior to concrete placement, a mix design for each class of
concrete shall be submitted with a complete list of materials including type, brand,
source and amount of cement, and admixtures; and applicable reference
specifications. Data regarding concrete aggregates shall also be submitted. Submittal
shall clearly indicate where each mix design will be used. Acknowledgment of receipt
shall be obtained prior to concrete placement.

9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

1 05 02

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Shop and Working Drawings


For shop, working and placing drawings see:
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03400 Precast Concrete
The Contractor shall submit for review all working and/or shop drawings, which
indicate the location of concrete placement and the related concrete strength class.
Detailed working drawings showing positions of construction joints not shown on the
Contract Drawings for approval.

1 05 03

Samples
The Contractor shall submit samples for
- all basic materials and ingredients for concrete mixtures;
- all accessories and built-in items under this section.
Unless otherwise required, samples shall be not part of the finished construction but
shall be retained at the job site until all work has been accepted.

1 05 04

Quality Control Submittals


Documented experience of site supervisor(s).(see: ref. 1 06 01 Part 1: General).
Reports and records of Contractors Source Q.C.(see: ref. 1 06 04 03 Part 1:
General)
Reports and records of Contractors Field Q.C.(see: ref. 3 04 Part 3: Execution)
Reports and records of Contractors Internal Q.C.(see: ref. 1 06 04 01 Part 1:
General)
Reports and records of Contractor's External Q.C.(see: ref. 1 06 04 02 Part 1:
General)
Certificates of compliance - not more than 12 months old - with referenced
standards for all materials and products related to cast-in-situ concrete and
accessories referred to under this Section.
Mix design(s) of concrete including test results as specified in ref. 2 02 01, Part 2:
Products.
Table 1 in Part 6: Annex shows the material reports to be submitted by the
Contractor and the frequency of those reports as indicated.

1 05 05

Handing-Over Submittals

1 05 05 01

Project Records
Upon completion of the construction, the results of all compressive strength tests,
of the w/c - ratio determinations and all other tests shall be handed over to the
Engineer.
All records shall be available on Site during the construction period and be
submitted to the Engineer on request. Along with all other notes these records
shall be kept by the Contractor for at least five years after the termination of job.

1 05 05 02

Operation & Maintenance Data

1 05 06

Other Submittals
Recommended suppliers and/or sources of all ingredients for making concrete,
including cement, water, fine and coarse aggregates, admixtures and additions
(item 1 in Table 1, see Part 6: Annex).
The name and location of the test laboratory to be used by the Contractor or
Contractor's concrete supplier, as well as the proposed program, methods and
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

details of plant, equipment and personnel to be used in testing ingredients, mix


design and concrete samples (item 4 in Table 1, see Part 6: Annex).
Contractors program, methods and details of plant and equipment to be used for
batching and mixing of concrete (item 5 in Table 1, see Part 6: Annex).
Contractors proposed methods for compliance with hot weather concreting (item
6 in Table 1, see Part 6: Annex).
Written reports of all tests and inspections of fresh and hardened concrete
performed in accordance with the requirements as indicated shall be submitted to
the Engineer within 24 hours after completion of tests and inspections unless
otherwise directed. Form of the reports is subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Procedure for developing bond at joints shall be submitted for review by the
Engineer.

1 05 06.01

Statements
0.1.Curing Concrete Elements: Proposed materials and methods for curing
concrete elements shall be submitted.
0.2 Concrete Pumping: Proposed materials and methods for concrete pumping
shall be submitted. Submittal shall include mix designs, pumping equipment
including type of pump, size and material for pipe, and maximum length and
height at which concrete will be pumped.
0.3 Method statement of concreting of mass concrete for foundations. Including
supporting calculations for Supervising Engineers approval.
0.4.Method statement of concreting of mass concrete for the transfer slabs
(exceeding 1.00m thick) in that the Contractor shall take into consideration the
requirements of the method of casting to ensure compliance with the design
criteria and deflection limitations. Including supporting calculations for
Supervising Engineers approval

1 06

Quality Assurance
The Contractor shall nominate a responsible and qualified engineer as Q. C.
Supervisor. Sampling, testing and checking shall be recorded on a daily basis
(i.e. indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the
Contractor if necessary.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later
than three (3) days after testing and checking unless otherwise indicated.
Reports and records shall be established in a manner to ensure traceability
between records, test results and locations of placed concrete.
Contractors own laboratory shall be located at Site unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
Failure by the Engineer or his Representative to detect any defective work or
material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when the defect is discovered
nor shall it obligate the Engineer for final acceptance.

1 06 01

Qualifications
Site engineer(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least
seven (7) years of documented experience in reinforced concrete works. He shall
have successfully completed reinforced concrete works similar in material,
design, and extent to that work indicated for the Project.
Site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least
five (5) years of documented experience in reinforced concrete works. He shall
have successfully completed reinforced concrete works similar in material,
design, and extent to that work indicated for this project .
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Concrete Foremen shall have knowledge of reinforced concrete and related


works at least three (3) years.
Concrete worker shall be familiar with all materials and installation procedures
and shall be skilled and trained.

1 06 03

Certifications
Prior to use, all concrete ingredients shall be sampled and tested in accordance
with DIN 1048 Part 1 to 3 or an equivalent standard by an approved laboratory to
determine compliance with specification and referenced standards.
The mix design for each class of concrete shall be as determined by the
Contractor through an approved laboratory and accepted by the Engineer.
With each mix design, independent laboratory tests reports or manufacturer's
external Q. C. certificates attesting the conformance of ingredients with the
specifications.
In case the source, brand or characteristic properties of the ingredients need to
be varied during the term of the Contract, a revised mix design prepared by an
independent laboratory shall be submitted (items 1, 2, and 3 in Table 1, see Part
6: Annex).
A certificate of an independent laboratory shall be submitted stating that each
admixture used is identical in composition to the sample used for acceptance
testing, and is compatible with all other material in the mix design (item 8 in Table
1, see Part 6: Annex).

1 06 04

Quality Control

1 06 04 01

Internal Quality Control

1 06 04 01 01

General
Contractors internal Q.C. shall include but not be limited to:
Checking suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance for basic
materials, mixes and accessories to be delivered to the job site prior to first
delivery and each shipment that comes from another source than the previous
one to conform compliance with specifications.
Checking suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and
compliance with supply order and specifications.
Quality inspection of supplier to ensure continuous quality control of ingredients
by periodic sampling, testing and reporting to the Engineer on the quality of
materials being supplied (item 2 in Table 1, see Part 6: Annex).
All design mixes, for each class of concrete, indicating that the concrete
ingredients and proportions will result in a concrete mix complying with the
requirements specified (item 3 in Table 1, see Part 6: Annex).
Checking proper storage of materials at least every one (1) week.
If cement, aggregates, concrete or accessories do not comply with the specified
requirements, the whole consignment will be rejected and removed from the Site.
Field Q. C see: Clause 3 04.
Reports of tests on materials and concrete samples shall include clear
identification of the source or batch number, specimen identification, physical
characteristics of the materials including temperature at time of sampling and
testing, ambient temperature, date and time of procurement and testing, curing
techniques for concrete if applicable, results of tests, point of incorporation of
concrete in the construction, design of concrete mix and concrete yield strength.
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

1 06 04 02

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

External Quality Control


The Contractor shall have at his disposal an approved independent laboratory,
which is equipped with all necessary apparatus for carrying out all tests required
according to the Contract specifications or directed by the Engineer.

1 06 04 03

Source Quality Control


Concrete shall be sampled and tested at the source prior to delivery.

1 06 04 04

Test Reports
0.1
Concrete Mix Design: Copies shall be submitted of test reports showing
that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties
specified and that the mix will be suitable for the project conditions. Test reports
shall be submitted along with the concrete mix design. The Engineers
acceptance shall be obtained before concrete placement.
0.2
Ordinary Portland cement: The Contractor shall submit results of tests for
Ordinary Portland Cement performed in accordance with ASTM C150, within
three weeks of submittals date.
0.3
Aggregates: The aggregate shall comply with ASTM C33 and the
submitted test results shall include the results of ASTM C 289, C227 and/or
ASTM C586 for potential alkali-silica reactions, and ASTM C295 for petrographic
analysis.

1 07

Delivery, Storage and Handling

1 07 01

Packing and Shipping

1 07 01 01

General
Concrete shall not be delivered until corresponding forms, reinforcement, and all
embedded items are in place and ready for concrete placement.
Materials shall be protected from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt.
Extra care shall be taken to ensure that materials can be accurately identified
after bundles are broken and tags removed.
Cement shall be delivered in bulk or in sealed and marked bags, and shall be
protected from the weather by enclosed transfer systems or other accepted
coverings. The Contractor shall provide accepted silos to store sufficient bulk
cement for continuity of work and the cement shall be placed therein upon
delivery. Accepted precautions shall be taken to prevent cement dust causing a
nuisance. If cement is delivered in bags, the Contractor shall provide suitable
storage to store sufficient bagged cement for continuity of work, and the cement
shall be placed therein upon delivery. The storage shall have adequate air
circulation needed to maintain the cement dry. Damp or open bags shall be
rejected.
Aggregate shall be stored in concrete-based bins or stages to prevent intermixing
and the inclusion of dirt and foreign materials. Aggregate shall also be shaded
from direct sunlight and shall be drained. Each size of aggregate shall be stored
separately with the various types and sizes necessary to meet the grading
requirements of the accepted mix. Storage bins or stages shall be sufficient for
continuity of work and shall be emptied and cleaned regularly. All necessary
measures shall be taken to prevent segregation of aggregates occurring during
storage and between mixes. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to
prevent nuisance of dust and shall provide an up-to-date aggregate washing
system.
All materials shall not be contaminated.

13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Accessories shall be clearly indicated and marked on the delivery note, invoice or
supplier's certificate supplied with a consignment, in particular the identification of
the manufacturer, the country of origin and the standard which they comply with.
All concrete accessories shall be delivered in adequate containers, drums or
bags.
Damaged packaged materials and damaged accessories will not be accepted.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to guard against any possibility of damage.

1 07 01 02

Basic Materials
Cement shall be delivered either in bulk by purpose-built vehicles or in sealed
bags.
Packaged cement shall be delivered to the mixing site in original moisture-proof,
sealed containers, which shall be labeled with the weight, name of manufacturer,
brand and type specified.
Containers of cement, which vary in weight by more than 3 %, will not be
accepted.
Mixing water supply shall be either through pipelines or with special tankers,
which are used for this purpose only.
Admixtures and additions shall be delivered in adequate containers or packages
and shall be clearly marked with the proprietary name, type, standard and the net
weight or volume.

1 07 01 03

Concrete
A delivery ticket from the ready mix plant for each batch delivered to the job-site
shall be submitted setting forth the following Information:
Date
Name of purchaser
Registration number of delivery truck
Name of driver
Class of concrete
Slump ordered
Air content
Amount of concrete in truckload in m3
Cement per m3 concrete in truckload
Total water in batch in liters
Type of admixtures used, if any
Type of cement used
Time of mixing of concrete (if dry, time cement added to aggregates)
Temperature specified (maximum)
*
Temperature of concrete (when discharged at location of placement)
*
Time of arrival at job-site
*
Time of discharge at job-site
*
Amount of extra water added in liters (at request of Contractors Q. C.
Super-visor only, and his signature)
*
Final location in concrete structure.
Remark:
* to be completed by the Contractor on job-site.

1 07 02

Storage and Protection

1 07 02 01

General
Accessories and embedded items shall be stored in order to prevent corrosion
and accumulation of dirt and oil.

14
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

1 07 02 02

Cement

1 07 02 02 01

Packaged Cement
Cement containers shall be stored in dry, weather-tight and proper ventilated
enclosures.
Sacked cement shall be stacked on pallets or similar platforms to permit proper
circulation of air.

1 07 02 02 02

Bulk Cement
Bulk cement shall be stored separately from packaged cement. Bulk cement
shall be stored in dry, weather-tight, well-ventilated bins or silos with provisions
for prevention of moisture absorption or the intrusion of foreign matter.
Storage facilities for bulk cement shall have separate compartments for each
type of cement used.
Storage silos shall be emptied frequently, preferably once per month, to prevent
cement caking.
Facilities for sampling of cement shall be provided at the weighing hopper, or at
the feed line immediately before entering the hopper.

1 07 02 03

Aggregates
Aggregates shall be transported and stockpiled separately according to their
sources and gradations. Aggregates shall be handled in a manner, which will
prevent contamination with earth or other matters.
If aggregates show segregation, or if the different gradations become mixed, the
aggregates shall be re-screened before placing in the proportioning bins.
Aggregates shall not be transferred directly from trucks, railroad cars or barges to
the proportioning bins when moisture content or/and water absorption is such
that it will affect the accuracy of the proportioning of the concrete mixture. In such
cases, the aggregates shall be stockpiled until the excess moisture drains off.
Muddy or oil-leaking equipment shall not be allowed to operate on the stockpiles.

1 07 02 04

Mixing Water
Water shall be stored in closed water tanks and kept at an appropriate
temperature.

1 07 02 05

Admixtures and Additions


Admixtures shall be stored in such a manner as to permit an easy access for
proper inspection and identification of each consignment, and in a suitable
welterweight location protected from dampness, sun radiation, heat and frost.
Admixtures manufactured in liquid form shall be protected from freezing.
Admixtures manufactured in powder form may be converted to liquid for
dispensing. Mixing drums or storage tanks from which the admixture will be
dispensed shall be equipped with agitation or mixing equipment to keep solids in
suspension.
The requirements for storage of powdered admixtures shall be the same as
those for storage of cementitious materials.
Storage and handling of admixtures shall comply with ACI 212.1 through ACI
212.3 or an equivalent standard.

1 07 02 06

Temperature Control
The Contractor shall provide procedures and facilities to control or reduce the
temperature of all materials used in the concrete mix during hot weather at air
15
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

temperature over 32 deg C. The following methods may be used to assist in


lowering the temperature of fresh concrete to meet the limit values at the point of
placement (see Clause 2 02 05):
(a) Exposed water tanks and piping, the roofs and vertical walls of
cement storage silos or buildings, the tops and vertical walls of mixer discharge
hoppers, weighing hoppers, mixer drums and tops of mixer discharge hoppers
may be shaded from the rays of the sun when it is 30 degC or more above the
horizon, and may also be protected from drying winds by screens.
(b) Mixing water for concrete may be chilled by the use of heat
exchanger coils, or by the addition of flaked ice.
(c) Coarse aggregates may be cooled by misting, provided that any
moisture retained is taken into account when determining the water-cement ratio
for the mix.
(d) Aggregates reclaimed from stockpiles by the tunnel method may be
cooler than those from the surface layer of the stockpile.
(e) Shade and wind protection may be used to protect the elevating
conveyor to the batching plant.

1 08

Project and Site Conditions

1 08 02 01

Dust Control
Dust caused by Contractors operations on and near work shall be controlled by
use of all means necessary.

1 08 02 02

Pollution Prevention
Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent pollution of ground with fuel, oil,
chemicals or other harmful materials.

16
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Part 2: Products
2 01 Basic Materials
2 01 01

Cement
Portland cement and sulphate resisting cement shall comply with SASO 143,
SASO 570, SASO 855 and SASO 1250.
Cement not covered by SASO 143, SASO 570, SASO 855 and SASO 1250 shall
conform to ASTM C 150, DIN 1164 or an equivalent standard.
Cement shall be of an approved brand and shall be obtained directly from an
approved manufacturer or an approved supplier.
Different brands of cement, or the same brand from a different source, shall not
be used without approval by the Engineer.
High alumina cement shall not be used unless otherwise indicated.
Rapid-hardening Portland cement and cement with a low heat of hydration shall
only be used as indicated and approved by the Engineer.
Cement type and strength class for work above or below ground level shall be as
indicated and approved.
Methods of sampling and testing shall comply with SASO 142 and SASO 1251.
Sampling and testing not covered by SASO 142 and SASO 1251, shall conform
to ASTM C 150, DIN 1164 or an equivalent standard.
Cement which has been stored for more than 3 months shall be tested in
accordance with the above mentioned standards before use with regard to:
- Fineness (Blaine)
- Setting time (Vicat)
- Compressive strength.
The following mandatory tests shall be carried out for any cement consignment
on a representative sample if no certification according to Clause 1 06 03 can be
provided by the Contractor:
- Fineness (Blaine)
- Setting time (Vicat)
- Soundness.
- Compressive strength.
- Lime saturation factor.
- Chemical analysis.
If the representative sample fails any of the mandatory tests, two new samples
shall be taken from the same group and all the mandatory tests shall be
repeated.
The group shall be considered conforming to the standard if the two new
samples pass all the repeated mandatory tests.

2 01 02

Aggregates

2 01 02 01

General
Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33. Coarse aggregate to withstand the
specific environmental conditions shall be used. The Contractor shall obtain
acceptance of the proposed aggregate sources, and shall select suitable
samples of fine and coarse aggregate for specified testing before obtaining the
aggregate. Laboratory tests shall be made at regular intervals to confirm the
suitability of the aggregate. The acid-soluble Sulphate (SO3) level in the
combined aggregate as a percentage by weight shall not exceed 0.4%. The acid17
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

soluble chloride ion (Cl) in the combined aggregate as a percentage by weight


shall not exceed 0.05%.
Water to be used for cooling and/or washing aggregates shall have the quality of
mixing water.

2 01 02 02

Normal Weight Aggregates


Aggregates shall comply with BS 882, ASTM C 33, DIN 4226 or an equivalent
standard.
Sizes and grading of aggregates shall comply with ACI 318, DIN 1045, DIN
52114 or an equivalent standard.
Sampling and testing shall conform to DIN 4226 or an equivalent standard.
For test frequencies see item 10 in Table 1 (see Part 6: Annex).

2 01 02 02 01

Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand or a
combination of both, and shall be composed of clean, hard, durable spherical or
cubical particles.
The salt content of fine aggregate shall not exceed the limitations as set out in
Table 2 (see Part 6: Annex) unless otherwise indicated or approved.
Deleterious substances shall be limited in fine aggregates to the amounts shown
in Table 3 (see Part 6: Annex) unless otherwise indicated or approved.
The amount of material passing a 75-micron (sieve No. 200) when tested in
accordance with ASTM C117 shall not exceed 3% by weight. When subjected to
five cycles of the soundness test specified in ASTM C88, fine aggregate shall
show a weight loss not exceeding 10% when magnesium sulphate solution is
used.

2 01 02 02 02

Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed gravel, or crushed stone
confirming the requirements of ASTM C33. The coarse aggregate shall comply
with the grading of size No. 67 (19.0 to 4.75 mm) and shall be of a nominal
maximum size not exceeding 19 mm. The amount of material passing a 75micron (sieve No. 200) when tested in accordance with ASTM C117 shall not
exceed 1% by weight.
When subjected to five cycles of the soundness test specified in ASTM C88,
coarse aggregate shall not show a weight loss exceeding 10% when Magnesium
sulphate solution is used. Flaky and elongated aggregate shall not be permitted.
The salt content of coarse aggregate shall not exceed the limitations as set out in
Table 2 (see Part 6: Annex)unless otherwise indicated or approved.
Deleterious substances shall be limited in fine aggregates to the amounts shown
in Table 4 (see Part 6: Annex) unless otherwise indicated or approved.

2 01 02 02 03

Grading of Combined Aggregates


The grading of fine and coarse aggregates shall be within the limits as shown in
Table 5 (see Part 6: Annex) unless otherwise indicated or approved.
The grain size distribution (grading curves) is subject to approval of the Engineer.
The maximum nominal grain size related to spacing of rebars shall be as shown
in Fig. 1 (see Part 6: Annex) unless otherwise indicated or approved.

2 01 02 03

Lightweight Aggregates
Lightweight aggregates shall be composed predominately of lightweight cellular
and granular inorganic material.
18
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

The unit weight of successive shipments of lightweight aggregates shall not differ
from the submitted sample by more than 10 %.
Lightweight aggregates for structural concrete shall comply in all respects with
ASTM C 330, DIN 4226-2 or an equivalent standard.
Lightweight aggregates for insulating concrete shall comply in all respects with
ASTM C 332 or an equivalent standard.

2 01 02 04.

Quality and Testing of Aggregates


Aggregate shall be free from dust, clay, loam and soft, clayey, shaley or
decomposed stone, organic matter and other impurities and shall be hard and
dense, to satisfy the properties and limits specified herein. Aggregate shall not
contain any matter, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is likely to undergo
disruptive expansive reactions with alkalis in the mix or likely to otherwise affect
the long-term durability of the concrete.
As precautionary measures against deleterious alkali-silica reactions, the
Contractor shall send samples of the aggregates proposed to be used to an
accepted specialized laboratory for petrographic analysis and alkali-aggregate
reactivity tests, including testing by chemical methods described in ASTM C289,
or rock cylinder test ASTM C586, and mortar bar tests in accordance with ASTM
C227.

No.
1

Test

Coarse or fine aggregate


1/ day or 1/200 m3

Grading

Whichever is more frequent


2

Magnesium sulphate soundness

Initial only or When When changing


the source

Specific gravity and Absorption

1/ week or 1/1000 m3 Whichever is


more frequent

Materials finer than 75-microns

1/ day or 1/200 m3 Whichever is more


frequent

Clay lumps and friable Particles

1 / week or 1/1000 m3Whichever is


more frequent

Organic impurities

Sulphate and chloride content

1/ week or 1/1000 m3 Whichever is


more frequent

Resistance to Degradation by
Abrasion and Impact in the Los
Angeles Machine

1/ week or 1/1000 m3 Whichever is


more frequent

Elongation and flakiness

1 / day or 1/200 m3

10

Potential alkali reactivity

1/ week or 1/1000 m3 Whichever is


more frequent

Initial only or When changing the


source

19
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

11
T
h12
e

Moisture content

2 / day

Petrographic analysis

Initial only or When changing the


source

tests shown in Table (1) shall be conducted to assess the suitability of


aggregates. The frequency of these tests shall be in accordance with Table (1),
or as otherwise specified more frequently by the Engineer. The tests shall be
carried out in accordance with ASTM Standards, as appropriate, and the results
shall comply with the limits given therein, or as otherwise stated herein.
Table (1) - Frequency of Tests for Aggregates

Grading test shall be carried out daily or per 200 m3 of concrete whichever is
more frequent, when concrete is being produced on a regular basis, or
beforehand when production is irregular. The combined grading of aggregate
shall be constant. The percentage passing any sieve size, as determined by
accepted trial mixes, shall be the target grading for all concrete of that type. The
combined grading of the works concrete shall not vary on any sieve from that
target by more than 4.0% of the total quantity of fine and coarse aggregate. If the
estimated or measured combined grading of the permanent works concrete does
not meet this requirement, a new trial mix shall be prepared for acceptance.

2 01 03

Mixing Water
Water for concrete mixing shall be potable unless otherwise indicated and
approved.
Mixing water shall be suitable to ensure that the salts content of the total
concrete mix does not exceed the limitations set out in Table 2 (see Part 6:
Annex). All water shall be tested and testing has to be approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements and obtain acceptance for the
provision of fresh water for the manufacture and curing of concrete. Water to be
used for mixing and curing concrete and mortar shall be fresh and free from
sediment and dissolved or suspended matter which may be harmful.
Water samples from the intended source of supply shall be taken for analysis
before any concrete work is commenced, and at intervals throughout the duration
of the Works as specified by the Engineer. If the samples are unacceptable, the
Contractor shall either change to a new supply or take steps to improve the
existing source as accepted.
The Sulphates (SO3) content shall not exceed 300 mg/L and the chloride ion
content shall not exceed 500 mg/L. Tests to establish the contents shall be
carried out at weekly intervals. These limits shall be subjected to the overall limit
given for the concrete as mixed.

20
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

2 01 04

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Admixtures and Additions


Admixtures and additions used as indicated shall be proprietary products added
in the proportions and manner recommended by the manufacturer unless
otherwise indicated.

2 01 04 01

Admixtures
The tests for quality control of admixtures shall be carried out according to ASTM
C 260, ASTM C 494 respectively or equivalent standards.
Agitation of admixtures manufactured in liquid form shall be as recommended by
the manufacturer.
Any concrete to include admixtures shall first undergo a suitability test and have
to be approved by the Engineer. The trial mixes will be compared with concrete
of the same class but containing no admixture to determine the effects of the
admixture especially regarding workability, strength, setting time, and density.
0.1
Achieving workability with the lowest appropriate water-cement ratio in
order to achieve durability.
0.2

Controlling and retarding setting.

0.3

Reducing bleeding and associated plastic settlement and cracking.

Admixtures shall comply with the following standards unless otherwise indicated:
(a) Water reducing agent shall comply with ASTM C 494 or DIN 51043.
(b) Retarding agent shall comply with ASTM C 494 or DIN 51043.
(c) Accelerating agent shall comply with ASTM C 494.
(d) Water reducing and retarding agent shall comply with ASTM C 494 or DIN
51043.
(e) Water reducing and accelerating agent shall comply with ASTM C 494.
(f) Air-entraining admixture shall comply with ASTM C 260 or DIN 4164.
The total volumetric air content of air-entrained concrete after pouring shall be
within 4 to 6% for maximum aggregate size of 20 mm and 3 to 5% for maximum
aggregate size of 40 mm unless otherwise approved.
Corrosion inhibiting admixtures and all other admixtures shall be tested
according to the directions of the Engineer.
Admixtures containing chlorides or other corrosive agents shall not be used.
In the event of admixtures being used, the concrete tests described in the
Specifications shall be incorporated to ensure the specified strengths are
achieved and comparison shall be made with concrete manufactured without the
admixture to prove that the density has not been reduced and the other
characteristics have not been adversely affected. If air-entraining agents are
used, the density shall not be reduced by more than 5%.
When admixtures are used in the Works, very strict control shall be maintained to
ensure that the correct quantity of admixture is used at all times. The equipment
to be used for dispensing and the method of incorporating the admixture in the
concrete shall be to the acceptance of the Engineer. The dispensing unit shall be
translucent such that the operator can see the discharge of the admixture.

2 01 04 02

Additions
The additions shall in no way adversely affect the concrete strength or contain
chemicals, which may be harmful to other building materials.
It is strictly forbidden to add gypsum to the cement or concrete.
21
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cement coloring addition shall be dry powder dust or mineral oxide dye. Total
coloring addition shall not exceed 6 % of the weight of cement.

2 02

Concrete

2 02 01

Design Criteria and Mix Design

2 02 01 01

General
Design concrete mixes are to have a minimum cement content per cubic meter of
concrete consistent with the required slump, a water content corresponding to
the appropriate water/cement (w/c) - ratio, a specified maximum size of coarse
aggregate, and a grain size distribution of aggregates, in accordance with limits
set forth in this Section, and in compliance with the structural design (see Clause
1 04 01). A design mix shall be proportioned in accordance with ACI 318, DIN
1045, ENV 206 or an equivalent standard, as determined by the type of structure
and exposure conditions, and adjusted to meet specified design mix
requirements. Mix designs shall be tested in accordance with the referenced
standards and reported on as specified herein unless otherwise indicated.
Concrete for use in the Works shall be classified as shown below. The class of
concrete is denoted by the 28-day characteristic strength and the nominal
maximum aggregate size. Characteristic strength shall be defined as the value of
the cube strength below which not more than 5% of the results of all possible
cube strength measurements of the specified concrete are expected to fall.
Except where otherwise specified, all concrete mixes shall be designed
according to the grades listed in Table (2). The criteria given in this table are
designed to achieve the desired concrete strength and durability.
The maximum cement content for any mix shall be 450 kg/m3 unless a higher
content is accepted by the Engineer giving due consideration to the increased
risk of shrinkage cracking or thermal stresses.

Table (2-a) - Description and Main Characteristics of Designed Concrete Mixes

Foundation

Slabs, beans
and Columns

Screed

Plain
Concrete

35/19

35/19

25/25

20/25

Sulfate
Resisting (Type
V)

OPC(Type I)

OPC (Type I)

OPC(Type I)

Aggregate Size No. According to


ASTM C33

67

67

57

57

Nominal maximum size of coarse


aggregates (mm)

19

19

25

25

28-day Characteristic Strength for


cubes (N/mm2 )

40

45

25

20

Minimum Cement Content


(kg/m3)

400

375

250

250

Maximum Cement Content


(kg/m3 )

450

450

350

300

Concrete Works
Mix Designation
Type of Cement according to
ASTM C150

22
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Maximum Free W/C Ratio


Slump at concreting location
(mm)

0.40

0.40

0.60

0.70

120-150

120-150

120-150

120-150

Temperature of Fresh Concrete


Maximum

oC

30

30

30

30

Minimum

oC

Sampling rate for testing

Initial setting time of concrete

2 02 01 02

each 50 m3 or
every casting
day, which is
more frequent

each 50 m3 or
every casting
day, which is
more frequent

from 3 to 6
hours

from 3 to 6
hours

each 100 m3 or
every casting
day, which is
more frequent
from 3 to 6
hours

each 100 m3 or
every casting
day, which is
more frequent
from 3 to 6
hours

Mix Design
According to ACI 318, any mix design shall be determined by one of two
methods: Proportioning on the basis of field experience, or proportioning by
laboratory trial batches and shall be submitted according to the form shown in
Table 6 (see Part 6: Annex).
Once a design mix for any class of concrete has been accepted by the Engineer,
it shall not be changed as to source, quality, quantity, and grading of materials, or
in any other way that reduces durability.
All proposed changes shall be accomplished by preparing a new mix design as
specified herein.
Mixes for the classes of concrete shown in Clause 3.1 herein shall be designed
by the Contractor. The design of concrete mixes shall be carried out in
accordance with ACI 211.The target mean strength shall exceed the specified
characteristic strength by a margin of 1.64 times the standard deviation expected
from the concreting plant, except that no standard deviation less than 3.5 N/mm2
shall be used as a basis for designing a mix. Unless otherwise accepted by the
Engineer, a standard deviation of 7 N/mm2 shall be used.
The workability of each class of concrete shall be such that satisfactory
compaction is obtained when the concrete is placed and vibrated in the Works
with no tendency to segregate when it is handled, transported and compacted by
the methods, which the Contractor proposes to use in the Works.
The total content of chlorides in concrete (as chloride ion) shall not exceed
0.20% by weight of cement and the total acid-soluble sulphates (as sulphate
ions) shall not exceed 4.0% by weight of cement in the mix.

Preliminary Mix Tests


The proportions of cement, aggregate, water and admixtures determined by the
Contractor in his mix designs shall be used in preliminary mixes of concrete
made and tested under laboratory conditions to determine for each class of
concrete, given in Clause 3.1 herein, the minimum practical water/cement ratio,
the optimum dosage of used admixtures, the optimum mix proportions of cement
with fine and coarse aggregate, and the resulting strength and workability.
Preliminary mixes shall be repeated until adjusted relevant requirements of
Clauses 3.1 and 3.2 have been achieved

23
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

2 02 01 02 01

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience:


Where a concrete production facility has a record, based on at least 30
consecutive strength test results that represent similar materials and conditions
to those expected, required average compressive strength used as the basis for
selecting concrete proportions shall exceed required strength margin at
designated test age by the standard deviation.
Strength test data for determining standard deviation shall be considered to
comply if data represents either a group of at least 30 consecutive results or a
statistical average for two groups totaling 30 or more results.
Strength test results used to establish standard deviation shall represent
concrete produced to meet a specified strength within 5.0 MPa of that specified
for the proposed class.

2 02 01 02 02

Proportioning on the Basis of Laboratory Trial Batches:


When laboratory trial batches are used as the basis for selecting concrete
proportions, strength tests shall be in accordance with ACI 318, DIN 1045 and
DIN 1048 or an equivalent standard.
A curve shall be established showing the relationship between the cement
content and the compressive strength. The curve shall be based on at least three
points, each point being the average of at least three cylinders tested at 28 days,
and representing batches, which produce strengths above and below the
required average compressive strength. The required average compressive
strength shall be 9.0 MPa greater than the design strength.
The minimum cement content for any concrete shall be that as shown by the
curve to produce the average compressive strength required for that class,
unless a higher cement content is required by a limit value.
Preliminary laboratory tests shall be carried out to determine the mixes
characteristics satisfying the Specifications with the available materials. Trial
mixes shall be tested to determine the following properties of mixes proposed for
field trial tests:
1. Bleeding in accordance with ASTM C232
2. Air content in accordance with ASTM C173 or ASTM C231
Consistency by the slump test in accordance with ASTM C143-90a
3. Initial setting time of concrete in accordance with ASTM C403
4. Flexural strength of concrete in accordance of ASTM C293-79 or C78-84
5. Compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C39-86
6. Splitting tensile strength in accordance with ASTM C490-90
7. Time of setting of concrete mixtures by penetration resistance in
accordance with ASTM C403-92
If the values obtained are unacceptable, the mixes shall be re-designed.

2 02 01 02 03

Reduction of Margin Based on Field Data.


In case sufficient test data have been determined from the job, the margin (the
amount by which the average strength must exceed the design strength) can be
reduced provided that:
- the probable frequency of strength tests falling more than 3.5 MPa below the
design strength will not exceed 1 in 100; and

24
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

- the probable frequency of the average of three consecutive strength tests falling
below the design strength will not exceed 1 in 100; and
- the approval of the Engineer has been obtained for such reduction on the basis
of Contractors tests reports.

2 02 01 02 04

Field Trial Mixes


At least 35 days before the commencement of concreting, field trial mixes shall
be prepared under full-scale site conditions and tested in accordance with ASTM.
These trial mixes of concrete shall preferably be mixed for the same time and
handled by means of the same plant as the Contractor proposes to use in the
Works. If the trial mixes have been accepted prior to setting up the batching
plant, these trial mixes shall be repeated before concreting commences.
Acceptable values for the limits of these properties shall be established during
the trials. These values shall henceforth be used to monitor the quality control of
the mixes and set the standards of compliance.
All reinforced concrete classes shall have minimum flexural beam strength of
4.0 N/mm2 at 28 days.

2 02 01 02 05

Practical Tests on Trial Moulds


Unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out
practical tests on Site by filling trial moulds with trial concrete mix to confirm the
suitability of each class of concrete for the Works. Trial moulds shall be made for
reinforced and plain concrete with typical dimensions of the Works. The formwork
face of the trial mould, for each class of concrete, shall be designed to display all
the relevant surface finishes intended for use in the Works. In making,
transporting, placing, compacting and curing the trial mix concrete in the trial
moulds, the Contractor shall observe all the relevant requirements of the
Specifications.
When curing is completed, the trial moulds shall be stripped and the concrete
thus revealed shall be submitted for acceptance by the Engineer.
Where re-design of any concrete mix becomes necessary, the making and
testing of the Trial mix shall be repeated until the Trial Mix satisfies the above
requirements. The final acceptance of any Trial Mix of any class of concrete will
not be given if the Trial Mix does not comply fully with the specified requirements
appropriate to that class of concrete or if it does not satisfy the specified
requirements relating to salt content.
Further tests shall be carried out if any feature of materials or mixes is changed
during the course of the work.

2 02 02

Concrete Strength Classes


Concrete strength classes shall comply with ENV 206, DIN 1045 or an equivalent
standard.
Concrete shall be graded as indicated according to the strength classes shown in
Table 8 (see Part 6, Annex) on the basis of its compressive strength as
determined by testing of cubes of 200 mm nominal size at an age of 28 days
unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
Concrete shall comply with
- C I concrete construction sites (see Clause 5.2.1 of DIN 1045) or/and
- C II concrete construction sites (see Clause 5.2.2 of DIN 1045)
unless otherwise indicated.
The relation in percent between 7-days strength and 28-days strength shall be
determined by using the results of test specimen prepared for suitability tests.
25
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Water resistant concrete shall have a nominal compressive strength of at least


35 N/mm2 unless otherwise indicated.

2 02 03

Consistence of Fresh Concrete


Consistence ranges of fresh concrete are shown in Table 9 (see Part 6: Annex).

2 02 03 01

Cement Content
The minimum cement content per cubic meter fresh concrete shall be as
specified in Table 8 (see Part 6: Annex) for each class of concrete unless
otherwise indicated.
The required cement content shall be determined on the basis of a suitability test
and subject to the approval of the Engineer.

2 02 03 02

Ultrafine and Ultrafine/Fines Content


Concrete shall contain a certain quantity of ultrafine particles to be properly
workable and to achieve a closed texture.
Maximum ultrafine or ultrafine/fines content shall be as specified in Table 10 (see
Part 6, Annex) unless otherwise indicated.

2 02 03 03

Workability

2 02 03 03 01

Slump
The slump as specified in Table 8 (see Part 6: Annex) shall be maintained for
concrete at the point of delivery unless otherwise indicated.
The slump shall be within the following limits:
- Concrete designed for a 50 mm slump + 25 mm
- Concrete designed for a 100 mm slump + 35 mm
Concrete of an individual batch with a slump lower than the average slump of the
recent 10 batches tested, is subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Contractor is to assess slump at job-site for acceptable workability.
Where the slump is deemed inappropriate for acceptable workability the
Contractor's Quality Control Supervisor may authorize adding additional water to
the mix to obtain acceptable workability, but within the limitations of the concrete
durability as required by this specification.

2 02 03 03 02

Flow-table
The use of a flow-table and the flow-table spread (e. g. in accordance with DIN
1048, Part 1) shall be as indicated for concrete with special properties and
subject to the approval of the Engineer.

2 02 03 04

Water/Cement Ratio

2 02 03 04 01

General
The w/c-ratio established by suitability tests and approved with the mix design
shall not be exceeded.
To add any additional water during mixing , transportation and placing is not
allowed, unless under the supervision of Contractors Q. C. Supervisor and in
quantities which will not exceed the allowable w/c-ratio and which will not effect
the design strength of the concrete.

2 02 03 04 02

Maximum W/C-Ratio
For reinforced concrete the w/c ratio should not exceed 0.65.

26
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

2 02 03 04 03

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Water Resistant Concrete


Water resistant concrete shall have a w/c ratio not exceeding 0.55 if exposure
will be to fresh water or 0.50 for exposure to seawater unless otherwise
indicated.

2 02 03 04 04

Architectural Concrete
Architectural concrete for exterior exposure shall be air-entrained with a w/c ratio not exceeding 0.55 by weight unless otherwise indicated.

2 02 04

Type of Concrete

2 02 04 01

Structural Concrete
Normal weight plain, reinforced or prestressed concrete shall comply with ACI
318, ENV 206, DIN 1045 or an equivalent standard.
Structural lightweight or insulating concrete shall comply with ACI 211.2 or an
equivalent standard.
High density, heavyweight or mass concrete shall comply with ACI 211.1, ACI
304.3 or an equivalent standard.
Concrete may be site-mixed or ready-mixed.
Ready-mixed concrete shall comply with ASTM C 94, ACI 318, ACI 304, DIN
1084 or an equivalent standard and all other requirements set forth in this
specification.

2 02 04 02

Architectural Concrete
Designated colors and uniformity of colour shall be maintained.
For concrete of a desired colour, the same mixture proportions shall be used
throughout. Changes in the quantity of Portland cement per cubic meter shall be
particularly avoided .
Only one type and one brand of cement from the same mill, only one source and
one maximum size of coarse aggregate, only one source of fine aggregate, and
only one placing consistency shall be used.

2 02 05

Sampling and Testing


Sampling and testing shall comply with DIN 1045, DIN 1084, BS 1881 or an
equivalent standard.
Concrete strength quality control charts shall be maintained in accordance with
the requirements of ACI 214 for standard deviation and coefficient of variation
unless otherwise indicated.
The test frequency of compressive strength of concrete production shall be for
- Grade C I construction sites:

per maximum of 500 m3 for every type of


concrete, per storey, but at least every week.

- Grade C II construction sites: per maximum of 500 m3 for every type of


concrete, per storey, but at least every week,
every day for concrete grades higher than C25.

2 02 06

Plant and Site Mixture Trial Runs


Prior to the delivery of any concrete for permanent works to the job-site, the
Contractor shall demonstrate the suitability of the supplier and of the mix designs
by plant trial mixes. The Contractor shall obtain appropriate notice from the
supplier so that he may be present to witness the trial runs.
Trial batches of concrete shall be produced for all the classes of concrete
proposed, and shall be designed in accordance with Clause 2 02 01 above. Trial
27
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

mixtures shall be designed for maximum permitted slump, air content and
ambient temperature range of use.
A minimum of six (6) test cylinders shall be made and cured as indicated for each
w/c-ratio, using mix materials all of which shall be in the same temperature range
of the materials which will be used in the concrete to be delivered to the job-site.
Ambient temperatures and the temperatures of each trial batch shall be recorded
and made part of the test report.
Design mix shall be reworked and new test cylinders shall be prepared as
described in preceding Clause when average ambient temperatures differ in
excess of 15 deg C.
The report shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval based on the
Contractor's recommendation (see item 9 in Table 1, Part 6: Annex).

2 02 07

Weather Conditions

2 02 07 01

Cold Weather
No concrete shall be mixed or placed in position when the ambient temperature
is below 4 deg C unless otherwise indicated.

2 02 07 02

Hot Weather
The Contractor shall comply with ACI 305 unless otherwise indicated.
The fresh concrete temperature shall not exceed 38 deg C at time of pouring.
If the temperature of the concrete exceeds 38 deg C, precautionary measures
concerning mixing, transport, placing, consolidation and finishing of concrete
shall be put into effect approved by the Engineer.
Concrete shall not be placed when environmental conditions indicate a rate of
evaporation of surface moisture from concrete in excess of 1.0 kg per m2 per
hour unless otherwise indicated.
For testing evaporation see 3 04 Field Q. C.

2 02 07 03

Wet Weather
Unless adequate protection is provided and approval is obtained, concrete shall
not be placed during rain. Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the mixing
water nor to damage the surface finish.

2 02 08

Batching and Mixing


Concrete shall be batched and mixed at a central batching and mixing plant
and/or batched at a central batching plant and mixed in a truck mixer subject to
approval of the Engineer.

2 02 08 01

Batching:
Batching of cement in any plant shall be by weight
Batching of aggregates shall be by weight in any plant whose noted capacity is
less than 100 m3 / hr, but may be by volume in any plant of rated capacity
greater than 100 m3 / hr.
Batching of water and of admixtures may be by weight or volume.
Scales for weighing concrete ingredients shall be accurate within plus/minus 0.5
% of their total capacities. Standard test weights shall be available to permit
checking scale accuracy.
Operation of equipment shall be such that the concrete ingredients are
consistently batched within the following tolerances:

28
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

- Cement
- Water
- Aggregates
- Admixtures

+/- 3%
+/- 3%
+/- 3%
+/- 5%

Batching accuracy test records shall be obtained from the batching plant by the
Contractor monthly, comprising an account of weekly calibration tests and a
record of adjustments made and also accompanied by a statement as to the
accuracy of all measuring devices. This record shall be maintained at all times by
the Contractor, and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at any time.

2 02 08 02

Mixing

2 02 08 02 01

Central Mixing Plant


Measuring tolerances shall comply with DIN 1045, Part 9.2 and mixing capability
and time shall be in accordance with DIN 1084, Parts 1 to 3, or equivalent
standards.
The fine and coarse aggregates and the cement shall be mixed for not less than
four turns of the drum or paddle before the water is added. Water is to be added
gradually while the drum or paddle remains in motion, and the concrete shall be
mixed until a uniform consistency and colors have been obtained.
The quantity of water added to each batch shall be the net water, excluding
moisture content of aggregate and free water if any, but including water that will
be absorbed by the aggregate, dependent on absorption and moisture content
values determined daily and before any mixing takes place.
The water shall be added to the batch of concrete by means of a measuring
device with an automatic cut off of entry water whilst emptying into the mixer. All
valves, etc. shall be regularly maintained to ensure there is no leakage of water
into the mixing drum. The gauging receptacle shall be kept clean and must be
completely emptied after each batch.
The retempering of concrete which has partially hardened, by addition of cement
aggregate or water will not be allowed. Concrete which has been overmixed to
the extent that addition of water is necessary to preserve the required
consistency during discharge shall not be used.
The maximum size of the batch or mix shall not exceed the maximum rated
capacity of the mixer as stated by the manufacturer and stamped on the drum.

2 03

Accessories
All concrete accessories shall not impair the strength of the structure and shall be
located as indicated in the drawings or elsewhere.

2 03 01

Expansion Joint Filler


Pre-moulded expansion joint fillers shall be as indicated on the drawings or
elsewhere and shall conform to one of the following types.

2 03 01 01

Bituminous Type
ASTM D 994: "Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete" or equivalent.

2 03 01 02

Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types


ASTM D 1751: "Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete paving and
structural construction " or equivalent.

2 03 01 03

Sponge Rubber and Cork


ASTM D 1752: "Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint fillers for
concrete paving and structural construction" or equivalent.
29
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

2 03 01 04

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Premoulded Cell Material


See: 04200 Masonry

2 03 01 05

Extruded Polystyrene Boards


ASTM D 1056, ASTM D1667 or equivalent

2 03 02

Sealant
All sealing materials shall be as indicated and approved by the Engineer before use.
Sealant shall comply with one of the following or equivalent standards:
ASTM D 1190: Concrete joint sealer (hot-poured elastic type) or equivalent, see
Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

2 03 03

Waterstops
Material for waterstops shall extend each side into the concrete a minimum of
100 mm and shall be as indicated:

2 03 03 01

Copper
Corrugated copper jointing strips shall comply with ASTM B 370 or equivalent.

2 03 03 02

Stainless Steel
Stainless steel waterstops shall conform to ASTM A 167 or equivalent.
Unless otherwise indicated, they shall be of type 304, finish 2 D, annealed and
with a nominal thickness of 1.0 mm.

2 03 03 03

Non-metallic Waterstops
Non-metallic waterstops shall be flexible extruded polyvinyl chloride multi-rib
proprietary type. Minimum thickness 6 mm.

2 03 04

Thermal Insulation Materials


Thermal insulation shall be as indicated in Section 07200.

2 03 05

Anchorage Items
Slots and inserts for anchoring masonry and mechanical items to concrete shall
be as indicated and approved by the Engineer.
See Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement.

2 03 05 01

Slots
Slots shall be dovetail-type, of not lighter than 0.65 mm zinc-coated steel, with
filler that prevents concrete or water from entering and that can be easily
removed or punctured for installing anchors unless otherwise indicated.

2 03 06

Vapour Barriers
See Sections 07100 and 07150.

Part 3:

Execution

3 01

General Examination
The Contractor shall consider the weather conditions before starting concrete
production for permanent works and shall make sure that any precautions have
been taken to comply with the specified concrete quality.
When materials and components are distributed to the work position ensure the:
30
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

- Correct design dimensions of the components.


- Safe construction and three-dimensional bracing of formwork, falsework and
scaffolding, ensuring that they are not overloaded, e.g. during transport of
concrete, or as a result of materials stacked on them.

3 02

General Preparation

3 02 01

Equipment for Placing and Working Concrete


For transporting, placing and curing site-mixed concrete and ready-mixed
concrete, the plant and equipment for proper placing and for obtaining uniform
concrete strength shall be available on site and regularly serviced.

3 03
3 03 01

Installation
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Before casting formwork shall be completed and all water shall be removed.
Reinforcement shall be secured in place; expansion joint material, anchors and
other embedded items shall be positioned and the entire preparation shall be
accepted by the engineer.
Hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the inner
surfaces of the conveying equipment.
Semi-porous subgrade shall be sprinkled sufficiently to eliminate suction and
porous subgrades shall be sealed in an approved manner.
Where concrete is to be deposited on rock, all loose material must be removed,
and cut faces shall be nearly vertical or horizontal.

3 03 01 01

Batching and Mixing


see Part 2: Products.

3 03 01 02

Transportation
Truck mixers shall be of the revolving drum type, watertight and generally in
accordance with ASTM C 94, DIN 1045, Part 9 or an equivalent standard.
Truck mixing shall be continued for not less than 50 revolutions, after all
ingredients including water are in the drum. The speed shall be not less than 4
revolutions per minute and not more than a speed resulting in a peripheral
velocity of 70 meters per minute.
Temperature of concrete leaving the mixing plant shall be such that at the time of
placement the maximum temperature does not exceed that specified for its
placement.
Concrete shall be so transported, discharged and placed that contamination,
segregation or loss of the consistent materials does not occur.
Concrete shall be transported with agitators operating continuously in truck
mixers.
Concrete shall be compacted in its final position within ninety (90) minutes from
the time of adding of the cement into the aggregates, unless otherwise indicated.
Upon arrival at the place of deposition the concrete truck driver must present to
the Contractor a delivery ticket from the concrete supplier subject to the
acceptance of the Contractor of that concrete, stating the information as
described in Part 1. The Contractor shall collect and file all Batch Tickets for
inspection by the Engineer at any time.

31
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

3 03 01 03

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Placement
Deposition, distribution and consolidation shall comply with ACI 309, ACI 318, BS
8110, DIN 1045 or an equivalent standard.

3 03 01 03 01

Deposition and Distribution


Concrete shall be deposited continuously as near as possible to its final position.
In slab construction, placing shall be started along the perimeter at one end of
the work with each batch discharged against previously placed concrete.
In walls, beams, and girders, the first batches in each lift shall be placed at each
end of the section, with subsequent placement progressing toward the center. In
all cases, water shall be prevented from collecting at the ends, in corners, and
along faces of forms.
Placing of concrete in supported elements shall not be started until the concrete
previously placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic and has been in place
at least two hours.
It shall be ensured that there is an effective bond between concrete layers placed
at the individual job sections. The surface of construction joints shall be prepared
in accordance with Clause 3 03 02: Joints.
When concrete deposited in layers, thickness of layers shall be such that no
concrete will be deposited on concrete which was hardened sufficiently to
prevent the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.
Concrete shall not be dumped in separate piles and then leveled and worked
together; nor shall the concrete be deposited in large piles and then moved
horizontally into final position.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, construction joints shall be located as
shown in the drawings or as approved.
Placing shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete, which is being
integrated, with fresh concrete is still plastic. Concrete, which has partially
hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited.
Temporary spreaders in forms shall be removed when concrete placing has
reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary.
They may remain embedded in the concrete only if made of plastic or concrete
and if prior approval has been obtained.
The equipment shall be cleaned at the end of each operation or workday.

3 03 01 03 02

Consolidation
All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration so that the concrete is thoroughly
worked around the reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of
forms; eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing,
pitting, or planes of weakness. Internal vibrators shall have a minimum frequency
of 8000 vibrations per minute and sufficient amplitude to consolidate the concrete
effectively. They shall be operated by competent workmen. Use of vibrators to
transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Vibrators shall be inserted
and withdrawn at points approximately 450 mm apart. At each insertion, the
duration shall be sufficient to consolidate the concrete but not sufficient to cause
segregation, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. One spare vibrator for each three
vibrators in use shall be kept on Site during all concrete placing operations
unless otherwise approved.
Due regard shall be made of the size of any one pour of concrete to avoid the
generation of heat in any one mass of concrete.

32
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

3 03 01 04

Curing

3 03 01 04 01

General
Curing shall comply with ACI 308 or an equivalent standard.
Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from
premature drying, excessively hot temperatures, and mechanical injury and shall
be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for
the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete.
The materials and methods of curing shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
Moisture loss from surfaces placed against wooden forms or forms exposed to
heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping the forms wet until they can be
safely removed. After form removal, the concrete shall be cured until the end of
the time and methods indicated.
During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damage and
mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive
vibration.

3 03 01 04 02

Curing Water
Water used for curing shall meet the requirements of the mixing water.

3 03 01 04 03

Preservation of Moisture
For concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, one of the following procedures
shall be applied immediately after completion of placement and finishing:
(a) Ponding or continuous sprinkling
(b) Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet.
(c) Continuous application of mist spray.
(d) Application of waterproof sheet materials.
(e) Application of a curing compound:
The compound shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer immediately after any water sheen which may develop after
finishing has disappeared from the concrete surface.
It shall not be used on any surface against which additional concrete or other
material is to be bonded unless it is proven that the curing compound will not
prevent bond, or unless positive measures are taken to remove it completely
from the areas to receive bond applications.

3 03 01 04 04

Curing Time
Curing shall be continued for at least 14 days unless otherwise approved.
Alternatively, if tests are made of specimen kept adjacent to the structure and
cured by the same methods, moisture retention measures may be terminated
when the average compressive strength has reached 70 % of the specified
compressive strength of concrete (f c).

3 03 01 04 05

Materials for Curing Concrete


a) Impervious Sheeting: ASTM C 171; waterproof paper, clear or white
polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene-coated burlap.
b) Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound. ASTM C 309, white-pigmented, Type
2, Class B.
c) Others acceptable by the Engineer.
compressive strength of concrete (f c).
33
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

3 03 01 04 06

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Waterstops
Waterstops shall conform to COE CRD-C 513 or COE CRD-C 572. PVC center
bulb water-stops of minimum 250-mm width and 10 mm thickness shall be used.

3 03 01 05

Finishing of Formed Surfaces

3 03 01 05 01

As-Cast Finishes
As-cast finishes shall be as indicated:
01.0 Type 1 Finish:
Rough form finish for concrete surfaces not exposed to public view, or requiring a
waterproof coating.
Tie holes and defects shall be patched. Fins exceeding 5 mm in height shall be
chipped off or rubbed off. Surfaces shall be left with the texture imparted by the
forms.
02.0 Type 2 Finish:
The form facing material for concrete surfaces exposed to public view shall
produce a smooth hard, uniform texture on the concrete.
It may be plywood, tempered concrete-formgrade hardboard, sheet metal, or
other approved material capable of producing the desired finish. The
arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical with the
number of seams kept to the practical minimum.
It shall be supported by studs or other backing capable of preventing excessive
deflection. Material with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents,
or other defects, which will impair the texture of the concrete surface, shall not be
used. Tie holes and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely
removed.

3 03 01 05 02

Related Unformed Surfaces


Tops of walls or buttresses, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces
occurring adjacent to formed surfaces shall be smoothened after concrete is
placed and shall be floated to a texture reasonably consistent with that of the
formed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
Final treatment on formed surfaces shall continue uniformly across the unformed
surfaces.

3 03 01 05 03

Architectural Finishes
Architectural Finishes shall be as indicated:
01.0 Applied Finish
Finishes of plaster, stucco or similar trowelled materials shall be prepared to
insure permanent adhesion of the finish.
If the concrete is less than about 24 h old, it can be roughened with a heavy wire
brush or scoring tool.
If the concrete is older the surface may be roughened mechanically. After
roughening, the surface shall be washed free of all dust, chemical retarder, and
other foreign material before the final finish is applied.
02.0 Paint Finish:
Finishes of paint or similar materials shall be Type 2 Finish unless otherwise
indicated.
03.0 Textured Finishes:
Textured form liners may be of formed plastic sheet, wood, sheet metal, or other
material.
04.0 Aggregate Transfer Finishes
05.0 Exposed Aggregate Finishes:
Aggregate shall be exposed by a method approved by the Engineer such as
sandblasting, bush hammering or the use of a surface retarder.
34
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

06.0 Scrubbed Finish:


Scrubbed finish shall be produced on partially hardened concrete.
The surface shall be thoroughly wetted and scrubbed with stiff fibre or wire
brushes, using water freely, until the surface mortar is removed and the
aggregate is uniformly exposed. The surface shall then be rinsed with clean
water.
07.0 Sand Blast Finish:
The concrete surface shall be blasted with an abrasive (sand or grits) until the
aggregate is in uniform relief.
08.0 Tooled Finish:
The thoroughly cured concrete surface shall be dressed with electric, air, or hand
tools to a uniform texture, and shall be given a hand tooled, rough or fin pointed,
or bush hammered surface texture.

3 03 01 06

Finishing to Surfaces of Concrete Slabs

3 03 01 06 01

Scratched Finish
After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a
Class C tolerance the surface shall be roughened with stiff brushes or rakes
before the final set.

3 03 01 06 02

Floated Finish
After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off and leveled, the
concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating,
Floating shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when the
surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first
floating, plainness of surface shall be checked with a 3 meter straightedge
applied at not less than two different angles. All high spots shall cut down and all
low spots filled during this procedure to produce a surface within Class B
tolerance throughout. The slab shall then be re-floated immediately to a uniform
sandy texture.

3 03 01 06 03

Trowelled Finish
The surface shall receive a float finish. It shall next be power trowel led, and
finally hand trowel led. The first trowel ling after power floating shall produce a
smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still show some
trowel marks. Additional toweling shall be done by hand after the surface has
hardened sufficiently. The final toweling shall be done when a ringing sound is
produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The surface shall be
thoroughly consolidated by the hand toweling operations. The finished surface
shall be essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and
shall be plane to a Class A Tolerance.

3 03 01 06 04

Broom or Belt Finish


Immediately after the concrete has received a floated finish as indicated, it shall
be given a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or a burlap belt
across the surface.

3 03 01 08

Tolerances

3 03 01 08 01

General
Pouring layers shall be 150 to 500 mm thick for reinforced members, 400 to 500
mm thick for mass work, the thickness depending on the width between forms
and the amount of reinforcement.
The height of free fall of concrete shall be limited to 1.0 m maximum to prevent
separation.
35
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

3 03 01 08 02

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Concrete Cover
see: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement.

3 03 01 08 03

Finishes:
Finishes with Class A tolerances shall be true planes within 4 mm in 3 m, as
determined by a 3 m straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction.
Finishes with Class B tolerances shall be true planes within 6 mm in 3 m, as
determined by a 3 m straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction.
Finishes with Class C tolerances shall be true planes within 6 mm in 500 mm, as
determined by a 500 mm straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any
direction.

3 03 01 08 02

Patching
The total patched area shall not exceed 0.2 m2 in each 100 m2 of as-cast
surface. This is in addition to form tie patches unless otherwise indicated.

3 03 01 09

Architectural Concrete

3 03 01 09 01

General
In addition to the requirements as specified for structural concrete the following
conditions shall apply for Architectural Concrete:

3 03 01 09 02

Placing, Consolidation and Finishing


Smooth rubbed or similar finish shall have a full surface of mortar, avoiding the
production of surface voids.
Vibrators shall not be allowed to contact the formwork for exposed concrete
surfaces.
Architectural Finishes: see Clause 3 03 01 05 03.

3 03 01 09 03

Patching
Patching shall comply with Clause 3 05: Adjusting and Cleaning.
In addition, any patches in as-cast architectural concrete shall closely match the
colour and texture of the surrounding surface. The mix formula for patching
mortar shall be determined by trial to obtain a colour match with the concrete
when both patch and concrete are cured and dry. After initial set, surfaces of
patches shall be dressed manually to obtain the same texture as surrounding
surfaces.
In any finishing process, which is intended to expose aggregate in the surface,
patched areas shall show aggregate faces. The outer 25 mm of patch shall
contain the same aggregates as the surrounding concrete. In the case of
aggregate transfer finish, the patching mixture shall contain the same selected
colored aggregates.
After patches have been allowed to cure thoroughly, the aggregates shall be
exposed together with the aggregates of adjoining surfaces by the same process
of mortar removal.
Patches shall be protected from premature drying to the same extent as the body
of the concrete.

3 03 01 10

Water Resistant Concrete


Water resistant concrete for members 10 to 40 cm thick shall be graded so
dense that, when tested in accordance with DIN 1048 Part 1, water does not
penetrate to a depth of more than 50 mm (average value from three specimens).
Water resistant concrete shall be of strength class not below C35 unless
otherwise indicated.
36
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

For w/c-ratio see Clause 2 02 03 04.

3 03 02

Concrete Joints

3 03 02 01

Construction Joints

3 03 02 01 01

General
Construction joints not shown in the drawings shall be made and located as least
not to impair the strength of the structure and shall be approved by the Engineer.
In general, they shall be located near the middle of the spans of slabs, beams
and girders unless a beam intersects a girder at this point, in which case the joint
in the girder shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam.
Construction joints in walls and columns shall be at the underside of floors, slabs,
beams, or girders and at the tops of footings or floor slabs.
Beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, haunches, and drop panels shall be
placed at the same time as slabs.
Construction joints shall be at right-angles to the general direction of the member
and perpendicular to the main reinforcement.
Concrete shall not be allowed to run to a feather edge and vertical joints shall be
formed against a stop board. The top surface of a layer of concrete shall be level
and reasonably flat unless otherwise indicated.
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints.
All reinforcement shall be continued across construction joints unless otherwise
indicated. Keys and dowels shall be provided as directed by the Engineer.
The surface of the concrete at all joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and all
latencies removed prior to placing adjoining concrete.

3 03 02 01 02

Bonding
Bonding shall be obtained by the following methods unless otherwise indicated or
approved:
The hardened concrete of construction joints and of joints between footings and
walls or columns, between walls or columns and beams or floors they support,
joints in unexposed walls and all others not mentioned below shall be dampened
(but not saturated) immediately prior to placing of fresh concrete.
Joints receiving an approved adhesive shall have been prepared and adhesive
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to placing
of fresh concrete.
Surfaces of joints, which have been treated with an approved chemical retarder,
shall have been prepared in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations prior to placing of fresh concrete. Retarded mortar shall be
removed within 12 hours after placing to produce a clean exposed aggregate
bonding surface.
Roughening the surface of the concrete shall be undertaken in an approved
manner, which will expose the aggregate uniformly and will not leave latencies,
loosened particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the surface.
see Section 07900.

3 03 02 02

Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be placed and filled or sealed as indicated and approved.
Expansion joints shall extend through the entire structure, including the cladding
and the roof.
37
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete (except


dowels in floors bonded on only one side of joints) shall not be permitted to
extend continuously through any expansion joint.
Edges of exposed expansion joints shall be neatly finished with a slightly
rounded edging tool.
The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and all latencies
removed , grooves left for sealant shall be thoroughly cleaned out prior to
injection of sealant.
see Section 07900 Joint Sealers.

3 03 02 03

Contraction Joints
Contraction joints shall be made at locations as indicated on the drawings and
approved.
Contraction joints in slabs on grade shall be located and detailed as indicated.
Where saw-cut joints are required, cutting shall be timed properly with the set of
the concrete: cutting shall be started as soon as the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by the saw, and shall be
completed before shrinkage stresses became sufficient to produce cracking.

3 03 03

Concrete Accessories
Expansion joint material, waterstops, and all other embedded items shall be
positioned accurately and supported against displacement. Voids in sleeves,
inserts, anchor slots and the like, shall be filled temporarily with readily
removable material to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids.

3 03 03 01

Waterstops
Location of waterstops in expansion joints shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Each piece of premoulded waterstop shall be of maximum practicable length in
order to held the number of end joints to a minimum.
Spliced joints at intersections and at ends of pieces shall be made in the manner
most appropriate to the material being used.
Spliced joints shall develop effective watertightness fully equal to that of the
continuous waterstop material, shall permanently develop not less than 50 % of
the mechanical strength of the parent section, and shall permanently retain their
flexibility.
Waterstops shall be installed so as to form a continuous watertight diaphragm.
Adequate provision shall be made to support and completely protect the
waterstops during the progress of the work. Spliced joints shall be made as
follows:
Metal:
Copper shall be soldered or brazed. When stainless steel is used, splices shall
be lapped and welding and brazing shall be in compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Rubber or Neoprene:
Rubber or neoprene waterstops shall be vulcanized.
Polyvinyl Chloride:
With the adjacent surfaces heat-sealed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. The temperature shall be sufficient to fuse but not char the
plastic.

38
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

3 03 03 02

Vapour Barrier

3 03 03 02 01

Slabs on Grade
Immediately prior to placing concrete, subgrade under slabs shall be covered
with a vapour barrier unless otherwise indicated.
Punctures and tears shall be patched. Edges shall be lapped not less than 100
mm and end joints shall be lapped not less than 150 mm.
Edges and lapped joints shall be sealed with a pressure-sensitive tape, not less
than 40 mm wide, compatible with the membrane.

3 03 03 03

Embedded Items
Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items as
indicated and required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-inplace concrete in accordance with setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and
directions.

3 03 03 03 01

Conduits and Pipes:


Follow conditions indicated to control placing of conduits and pipes, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Locate conduits and pipes so as not to reduce strength of structure.
(a) Pipes:
Do not embed pipes in structural concrete, unless so detailed on drawings.
Provide sleeves in concrete for passage of pipes and locate so as to maintain
maximum strength of structure.
(b) Conduit:
Electrical conduits may be embedded in concrete provided the following
conditions are met:
- Outside diameter of conduit shall not exceed 1/3 of concrete thickness.
- Do not place conduits closer than three diameters on center.
- Do not embed conduits in structural concrete slabs less than 100 mm thick.
- Provide 40 mm minimum concrete cover for conduits in structural concrete
slabs. Run conduit at the neutral axis in slabs.
- Do not place conduits between bottom of reinforcing steel and bottom of
structural concrete slab.
- Conduits are not permitted in beams and girders unless shown on drawings.
a) The Contractor shall establish locations and dimensions of all holes and
chases required for services and submit details to the Engineer for checking
before proceeding with the Work.
b) Holes and chases in in-situ concrete shall be cast in. The Contractor shall not
cut hardened concrete or drill holes larger than 10mm diameter without
permission.
c) Holes, recesses and chases are in locations which least affect the strength,
stability and sound resistance of the construction, and are of the smallest
practicable size.
d) Holes must not exceed 300mm square otherwise the structural element must
be redesigned.
e) No chases are cut in walls of hollow cellular blocks without approval.
f) In walls of other materials:
39
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Vertical chases must not be deeper than one third of the single leaf
thickness.

Horizontal or raking chases must not be longer than 1m and not deeper
than one sixth of the single leaf thickness.

g) No chases or recesses are set back; offset by a clear distance not less than
the wall thickness. Where sockets, etc. are shown on drawings as nominally
back-to-back, obtain instructions.
h) No cutting is done until the mortar is fully set. Cut carefully and nearly,
avoiding spilling, cracking or other damage to surrounding structure. Do not
chases with mechanical or hand impact tools.
Bridging
The Contractor shall submit proposals for bridging over holes for ducts, pipes,
etc. which exceed 300mm in width.
Installing Pipe Sleeves
Sleeves shall extend through the full thickness of wall/floor and shall be
accurately positioned to give a minimum clearance around service of 20mm or
diameter of service, whichever is the least.
Sleeves, whether built in or installed in preformed holes shall be bedded solid.
Seal annular space between service and sleeve.
Where exposed to view, finish bedding and sealing neatly to approval.
Sealing Around Services
Seal around services pipes where they pass through walls with an approved
material. Completely fill the space, leaving no gaps and finish neatly.

3 03 03 03 02

Displacement of Reinforcement
No reinforcement for slabs or beams shall be bent or displaced to permit
passage of conduit pipes, or the like without the written approval of the Engineer.

3 03 03 03 03

Securing Embedded Items


Provide necessary ties, nailing blocks, bolts inserts, and other items required to
properly position and secure embedded items. Keep voids in embedded items,
which are not intended to be filled with concrete, free of concrete by means of
easily removable material.

3 03 04

Concrete Restoration and Cleaning


The recommendations of ACI 224.1R-93 and ACI 224.2R-92 shall be complied
with.
For adjusting, repair and cleaning of fresh cast concrete see: Clause 3 05!

3 04

Field Quality Control

3 04 01

Inspection
Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any defects or conditions that will
prevent satisfactory concrete works.

3 04 02

Notice of Commencement of Construction Work


Unless otherwise instructed, the Contractor shall give notice of the following to
the Engineer 24 hours before:
- start of concrete works.
40
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

- in the event of interruption (e.g. due to hot weather) the resumption of


concreting work;
- commencement of important welding operations on Site.

3 04 03

Concreting Permission
The Contractor is not allowed to cast any concrete works, normal or reinforced,
without written permission prepared and signed by the Engineer in accordance
with his instructions.

3 04 04

Field Laboratory

3 04 04 01

General
Contractors field laboratory shall be equipped with all necessary machines,
apparatus and staff unless otherwise indicated.
All field testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer or his
Representative in accordance with his instructions.

3 04 04 02

Temperature Control
Contractor shall check temperatures and provide precautionary measures for hot
or cold weather construction as required in Part 2: Products and Part 3:
Execution.
Evaporation shall be determined from the chart "Rate of Evaporation" (see Fig 2;
Part 6: Annex).
When the rate of evaporation is above the specified maximum limit, and/or any
value exceeds the limitations of the chart, concrete operations shall stop at the
nearest possible construction joint location and curing of the placed concrete
shall be intensified.

3 04 04 02 01

Ambient Air Temperature and Relative Humidity Test


The ambient air temperature and relative humidity shall be determined as
specified in ASTM E 337. Tests shall be taken as close to the concrete work as
practical and no further than 6 meters from the point of the latest concrete
placing.
If the rate of evaporation is near to the above-mentioned limit, at least one
ambient air temperature and relative humidity test shall be taken for each 50
cubic meters of concrete cast, or portion thereof, and the results of these tests
shall be recorded.
Increased frequency of testing may be specified by the Engineer if required .
Decreased frequency of testing may be authorized if it is judged by the Engineer
that the conditions have not changed significantly enough to alter results from
previous tests.

3 04 04 02 02

Wind Velocity Tests


The wind velocity shall be determined using a standard anemometer approved
by the Engineer.
The wind velocity shall be determined as close to the concrete work as practical
at a location representative of the average conditions at the site of the most
recent concrete pour.
At least one wind velocity shall be determined and the results of this test shall be
recorded.
Increased or decreased frequency of testing may be required by the Engineer in
conjunction with changes in frequency of the ambient air temperature and
relative humidity tests.
41
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

3 05

Adjusting And Cleaning

3 05 01

Repair of Concrete

3 05 01 01

General
After forms are removed, all bulges, fins, and small projections shall be removed
by chipping or tooling. The surfaces shall then be rubbed or ground. Any cavities
such as tie rod holes shall be filled unless they are to remain for decorative
purposes. Honeycomb areas shall be repaired and stains removed to present a
concrete surface that is uniform in colour.

3 05 01 02

Patching

3 05 01 02 01

General
Samples shall be applied and cured in an inconspicuous location, to determine
the most suitable proportions of cement. Steel trowelling shall be avoided since
this darkens the patch.
For patching of Architectural Concrete see Clause 3 03 01 11 03.

3 05 01 02 02

Holes and Other Cavities


If directed by the Engineer, holes and other cavities that are small in area but
relatively deep shall be filled with a dry-pack mortar. The mortar shall be mixed
as stiff as practical using 1 part Portland cement, 2 1/2 parts sand passing 2 mm
sieve, and just enough water to form a ball when the mortar is squeezed gently in
the hand. After the cavity has been cleaned of oil and loose material and kept
damp with water for several hours, the mortar shall be tamped into place in
layers about 10 mm thick. Vigorous tamping and adequate curing will ensure
good bond and minimum shrinkage of the patch.

3 05 01 02 03

Honeycombs
Honeycombs and other defective concrete shall be cut out to expose sound
material. No defective concrete shall be left adjacent to a patch to prevent
moisture getting into the voids. The edges shall be cut or chipped straight and at
right angles to the surface, or slightly undercut to provide a key at the edge of the
patch. No feather edges shall be permitted.

3 05 01 02 04

Patching Procedure
Before the patching concrete is applied, the surrounding concrete shall be kept
wet for several hours. A grout (1 part Portland cement, 1 part fine sand passing a
0.60 mm sieve, and sufficient mixing water for a creamy consistency) shall be
scrubbed with a brush into all surfaces to which the new material is to be bonded.
The area shall be damp when the grout is applied but not wet with free moisture.
Shallow patches can be filled with stiff mortar similar to that used in the concrete.
This shall be placed in layers not more than 10 mm thick, with each layer given a
scratch finish to improve bond with the subsequent layer. The final layer can be
finished to match the surrounding concrete by floating, rubbing, tooling, or on
formed surfaces by pressing the form material against the patch while still plastic.
Deep patches can be filled with concrete held in place by forms. Such patches
shall be reinforced and doweled to the hardened concrete.

3 05 01 02 05

Curing Patches
Curing shall be started as soon as possible to avoid early drying and shall be
continued for 7 days.

3 05 02

Cleaning
Concrete surfaces shall be uniform in colour when forms are removed.
42
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

All surfaces shall be cleaned from blotchy appearance and/or slight film of
release agent, mortar stains or rust stains after construction has progressed to
the stage where no discoloration will occur unless otherwise approved.
Concrete surfaces may be cleaned with water, chemical, and/or mechanical
cleaners. as approved by the Engineer.
Before finally selecting a cleaning method, the one chosen shall be tried on a test
area subject to the approval of the Engineer.

3 07

Protection
Protect the top of newly built concrete work from wet, hot or cold weather, in
particular from rain and from frost if imminent, and at all times when work is not
proceeding.
Care shall be taken especially with architectural finishes.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer, that ensures concrete works are without damage and deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.

43
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Part 4:

Method of Measurement

4 01

General

Walls measured by area with a bevelled cross section at the top will be measured to the highest edge.
Suspended floors and ceilings will be measured to the outside edge of the floor. Inclined and arched
ceilings will be measured as the development of the surface of the slab.
When measuring by volume, members which cross each other are calculated once only; main beams are
always calculated straight through. In the case of crossing with columns, and connection to columns the
latter are not included.
Where work is measured by volume, no deductions will be made for voids less than 0.25 m3.
Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding 1 m2.
No deductions will be made from concrete for reinforcement or sections built in.

4 02

Units Of Measurement

4 02 01

Works Measured by Volume

Cast-In-place concrete of the following categories will be measured by volume geometrically (m3):
- Foundations in trenches
- Isolated foundation bases
- Pile caps and ground beams
- Beds over 300 mm thick
- Suspended slabs which shall include floors, roofs, landings and the like over
300 mm thick.
- Upstands and kerbs
- Walls over 300 mm thick
- Columns
- Beams (measured below the slab)
- Steps and stair cases
Piles are measured by number or linear metre, rate includes concrete, reinforcement, and demolishing
piles up to the required level
Columns height are measured from surface of reinforced foundation or slab up to bottom of beam or slab.
Beams are measured C.L. To C.L. and its depth from bottom of beam to bottom of slab.
Cantilevers are measured C.L. to end and its depth from bottom of beam to bottom of slab

4 02 02

Works Measured by Area

Cast-in-place concrete of the following categories will be measured by area (m2) stating the thickness:
Blinding beds, suspended slabs which shall include floors, roofs and the like and landings not exceeding
300 mm thickness
Special surfaces finishes.

4 02 03

Sundries

Sundries prices are included in the rates of concrete work and shall not be measured or taken into
consideration unless it is clearly mentioned in the bill of quantities.
Expansion joint material or the like shall be measured by length (m) or area (m2).
44
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Designated joints, waterstops or the like shall be measured by length (m).

45
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Part 5:

Basis Of Payment

5 01

General

Payment will be in full compensation for the delivery, transport, placement and finishing of Cast-In-Place
Concrete, including all labour, plant, equipment, tools, traffic control, certifying and testing, quality
assurance, and all other operations to perform the work, including but not limited to the following
ancillary works (ref. 5 02).
Material, which is unnecessarily wasted, disposed off site, or otherwise misused, shall be replaced at
Contractors expense.
No payment will be made for quantities resulting from oversized or unauthorized work or any other
unauthorized operation.
Material or work, which does not conform to specification requirements, shall be removed and replaced
at Contractors expense.

5 02

Ancillary Works to be included in the Unit Rate

The unit rate for concrete include for working at different levels, hoisting and covering, laying in bays,
construction joints, cast in place and vibration, finishing surface of concrete, unless otherwise noted,
protecting and curing by any material working concrete in and around reinforcement.
The unit rate for concrete include for all materials (fine and coarse aggregates, cement, steel
reinforcement steel chairs, additives, water, formwork, all kinds of shuttering and scaffolding etc.).
The unit rate for concrete include for mechanical mixing or ready-mix concrete.
The unit rate for concrete include for shuttering dismantling, and dismantling agents.
Concrete accessories (including waterstops and vapour barriers unless it is clearly mentioned in the Bills
of Quantities), embedded items, mortises, plugs, grouting for general fixing of joinery and metal work shall
be deemed to be included in the unit price rates.
Costs of all tests shall be included in the unit price rates.
External Q. C. by Third Party.
Certifications.

46
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Annex: Tables and Figures


6 01

Tables

6 01 01

Summary of Contractors Reports and Submittals


Table 1: Summary of Contractors Reports and Submittals
TI TLE

No.
1

Sources of materials

Supplier Quality
Inspection Plan

Mix Design for all


Classes of Concrete
Reference
(Table 6)

Name, Location,
Equipment & Personnel
of Test Laboratory to be
used by Supplier
(including own
laboratory)
Program, Methods and
Details of Batching plant
& Equipment
Proposed Methods of
Complying with Hot
Weather Mixing and
Delivery
Certificate for Cement
from Manufacturer

REPORT SUBMITTED
31 days prior to
delivery of concrete
On apparent
chanqe
31 days prior to
delivery of concrete

FREQUENCY OF
REPORT
a) One time
b) As required
a) One time

31 days prior to
delivery of concrete
when mix is redesigned for any
purpose
31 days prior to
delivery of concrete
If changed

a) One time

31 days prior to
delivery of concrete

a) One time

31 days prior to
delivery of concrete

Each
summer

b) As required
a) One time
b) As required

(March to October)

31 days prior to
delivery of concrete
For each new
delivery from
manufacturer

a) One time
b) As required

(Continued)

47
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Continued Table 1: Summary of Contractors Submittals

No.
8

10

TI TLE
Certificates for Admixtures
from Manufacturer

Report on Plant Trial Mixes with 7


day & 28 day Test of Results for
all Classes of
concrete Required for
the work
Report of the following tests on
Fine and Coarse Aggregate:
Los Angeles Abrasion at
100 & 500 Revolutions
Sieve Analysis
3) Clay, Silt F, Dust
(passing 75 micron)
C I a y lumps & Friable
Particles
Water Absorption.
Percentage of sulphates
(SO3) Chlorides (NaCI)

11

Reports of the following tests on


water for mixing concrete,
washing and/or cooling
aggregates and curing:
1) Sulphates (as SO3)

REPORT SUBMITTED
31 days prior
to delivery of
concrete
If any change
occurs
31 days prior
to delivery of
Concrete
b) If changed
31 days prior
to delivery of
concrete

b) During production
of concrete

31 days prior
to delivery of
concrete
During
production of
concrete

2) Chlorides (as Nac1)


Delivery ticket
12

13

Reports and records on tests of


accuracy and calibration for
concrete plant equipment and
measuring devices

with delivery
of each load of
concrete
as applicable

FREQUENCY OF
REPORT
One time
b) As required
One
time
b)

As required
one time

Weekly
(with
independent
check report
monthly
One time
Weekly
(with
independent
check report
monthly
Each
delivery
Monthly

48
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

6 01 02

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Total allowable salts contents

Table 2: Total allowable salts contents

SALT

MAXIMUM ALLOWANCE PERCENT BY WEIGHT


In Fine
In Coarse
Total by
Aggregate by
Aggregate by
weight of
weight of fine
weight of coarse
cement
aggregate
aggregate

Chlorides
(NaCI)**

0.06

0.10

0.50*

Sulphates
(SO3)

0.40

0.50

4.00*

* Includes salts in cement and water


** equivalent determined by chloride ion x 1.6

6 01 03

Fine Aggregates - Allowance of deleterious substances

Table 3: Fine Aggregates Allowance of deleterious substances


Item

Maximum Allowable
Percentage by weight
1.0
2.0

Clay lumps and friable particles


Material finer than 75 micron

6 01 04

Coarse Aggregates - Allowance of deleterious substances

Table 4: Coarse Aggregates Allowance of deleterious substances


Item

Maximum Allowable
Percentage by weight
1.0
1.0

Clay lumps and friable particles


Material finer than 75 micron

6 01 05
Concrete

Grading Limits of Combined Fine and Coarse Aggregate Mix for

Table 5: Grading limits of combined fine and coarse aggregate mix for concrete

49
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

S I E V E (mm)

75
38.1
19
9.5
4.75
2.36
1.18
0.60
0.30
0.15
75 micron

6 01 06

Percentage Passing (by weight)


20 mm nominal size of
40 mm nominal size
maximum aggregate
of maximum
aggregate
100
100
90 100
90 100
65 85
55 70
35 60
35 55
25 45
30 45
22 40
25 42
18 38
22 38
15 33
10 20
6 - 17
08
06
0-2
0-2

Form of Standard Mix Presentation

Table 6: Form of standard mix presentation

S T A N D A R D M IX D E S IG N P R E S E N T A T IO N
S u p p lie r a n d C la s s o f C o n c re te :
3
C e m e n t C o n te n t a n d T y p e
: (k g /m )
W a te r C e m e n t R a tio
:
3
3
F re e W a te r
: (litre s /m ) o r (k g /m )
S p e c ifie d S tre n g th 2 8 d a y s
: (M P a )
C u rre n t M e a n S tre n g th
: (M P a )
C u rre n t S ta n d a rd D e v ia tio n
: (M P a )
A d d itiv e T y p e
:
A d d itiv e T y p e
: (litre s /m 3 ) o r (k g /m 3 )
S lu m p 3 0 m in u te s /s lu m p
6 0 m in u te s (in la b o ra to r y )
: (m m )/(m m )
A ir c o n te n t
: (% )
C h lo r id e s ( a s N a C l) *
: (% )
S u lp h a te s (a s S O 3 )*
: (% )
M e th o d o f P la c e m e n t* *
: P u m p /O th e r
C o m b in e d A g g re g a te G ra d in g
:
75
3 8 .1
19
9 .5
4 .7 5
2 .3 6
1 .1 8
0 .6 0
S ie v e
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
S iz e
%
p a s s in g
by
w a s h in g
L o s A n g e le s A b ra s io n 5 0 0 re v s /1 0 0 re v s

: (% )/(% )

C la y a n d F ria b le P a rtic le s

: (% )

V a lid H o t W e a th e r T ria l M ix
R e p o rt a tta c h e d

:Y e s /N o

0 .3 0
mm

0 .1 5
mm

75
m ic ro n

* T o ta l in m ix , e x p re s s e d a s a p e rc e n ta g e b y w e ig h t o f c e m e n t
* * E n c irc le a s a p p ro p r ia te

50
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

6 01 07

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Proportioning Strength and Standard Deviation

Table 7: Proportioning strength and standard deviation


Required strength Margin
MPa
4.1
5.7
7.4
9.0
11.5

6 01 08

Standard Deviation
MPa
2 to 3
3.1 to 4
4.1 to 5
5.1 to 6
6.1 to 8

Concrete Mix Design and Standard Parameters

Table 8: Concrete mix design and standard parameters

Nominal
28 Day
Size of
Concrete Class Compressive Maximum
Strength
Designation
Aggregate
C 10
C 20
C 25
C 35

Mpa

mm

10
20
25
35

20
20
20
20

Minimum
Cement Content
kg/m3
50 mm
slump

Maximum free
water cement
ratio (by
weight)

100 mm slump

220
340
360
360

250
375
400
400

** 1.20
** 0.52
** 0.48
0.44

** All cement for concrete subject to exposure to sulphate attack shall be sulphate resisting cem

6 01 09

Workability of Fresh Concrete

Table 9.1: Consistence ranges of fresh according to DIN 1045

1
2
3
4
Spreading index, Compaction index
Consistence range
a, in cm

Designation
Symbol
1
Stiff
KS
> 1.20
13)
2
Plastic
KP
35 to 41
1.19 to 1.08
13)
3
Soft
KR
42 to 48
1.07 to 1.02
4
With flowing
KF
49 to 60
properties
13) Use of the compaction index is especially recommended for concrete
types listed in subclause 6.5.3, paragraph (3).

51
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Tables 9.2: Consistence classes of fresh according to ENV 206

52
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Slump classes
Class
Slump in mm
S1
10 to 40
S2
50 to 90
S3
100 to 150
S4
>160
The measured slump is to be
rounded off to the nearest 10 mm.
Vebe classes
Class
Vebe in seconds
V0
> 31
30 to 21
V1
20 to 11
V2
10 to 5
V3
<4
V4

Compaction classes
Class
Degrees of compactibility
C0
>1.46
C1
1.45 to 1.26
C2
1.25 to 1.11
C3
1.10 to 1.04

Flow classes
Class
Flow Diagram in mm
< 340
F1
350 to 410
F2
420 to 480
F3
490 to 600
F4

53
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

6 01 10

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Ultrafines and Ultrafines/Fines Content


Table 10:
Maximum Permitted Ultrafines and Ultrafines/Fines Content for Concrete
with Aggregate of 16 mm to 63 mm maximum particle Size
(DIN 1045, Table 3)

Content for Concrete with Aggregate of 16 mm to 63 mm maximum particle Size


(DIN 1045, Table 3)

1
Cement content
3
in kg/m

1
2

< 300
350

2
3
3,
Maximum permitted content, in kg/m of
Ultrafines
Ultrafines/fines
For test sieve aperture size of
0.125 mm
0.250 mm
350
450
400
500

54
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

6 02 Figures

Fig. 1: Maximum Nominal Size (NS) of Aggregate Related to Spacing of Rebars


Maximum NS: of smallest dimension (h, b, d) and 80 % or 90 % of the aggregate
respectively smaller than the smallest spacing (S) or smallest concrete cover (C)
according to grading area.

55
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Fig. 2: Effect of concrete temperature and air temperature, relative humidity and wind
velocity on the rate of evaporation of surface moisture.
This chart provides a graphic method of estimating the loss of surface moisture for
various weather conditions. To use the chart, follow the four steps outlined above .

56
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Annex:

Specific Information

7 01

Notes:

7 01 01

General
The following items may be used as explanatory information only or as well as
alternatives or additions to modify the specifications under Part 1 through Part 6.
furthermore following items shall draw the attention of the Specifier to the
importance of the structural design and the structural analysis as basis for
specifying Cast-In-Situ Concrete.
In addition, there are slight or essential differences between the standards or
codes referred to.
Tables and Figures shown in this Part 7: Annex: Specifier Information contain
values and limits excerpted from various standards (ASTM, ACI, BSI, DIN, etc.),
sometimes mixed-up.

7 01 02

Project Documents
The Project Documents shall include, but shall not be limited to the following
Project related information:
(1) Whether ordinary Portland or moderate sulphate-resisting cement shall be
used below ground level or not.
(2) Where cement with low heat of hydration is required.
(3) Where Low alkali cement is required.
(4) Where Rapid-hardening cement is required.
(5) Use of cements other than Ordinary Portland cement.
(6) Maximum particle size of aggregate.
(7) Requirements concerning mechanical properties of aggregates (if relevant).
(8) Kind and source of aggregate (if relevant).
(9) Types of admixtures to be used and location of use.
(10) Location of use of other than normal weight concrete.
(11) Specified compressive strength (class of concrete) and location.
(12) Use of additions and location of concrete containing them.
(13) Location of watertight concrete.
(14) Use of test specimens other than 150 mm cubes.
(15) Location and type of expansion joints.
(16) Location and type of contraction joints.
(17) Type and locations of all imbedded items.
(18) Requirements with regard to thermal insulation.
(19) Requirements with regard to waterstop and vapour barriers.
(20) Kind and location of finishing.
For additional detailed information what, where and how to specify in the Project
Documents see: ACI 301, ACI 302.1, ACI 303 and ACI 303.1.

57
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

7 02

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Quality Assurance and Quality Control


Contractors permanent concrete testing laboratory (including field laboratory, if
any) must undertake the following duties:
1. Checking the site equipment before commencement of concreting operations,
routine checking and advisory services during concrete making, placing and
curing.
2. Tests for all concrete ingredients and concrete mixes within a frequency to be
indicated by the Specifier: Internal Q. C. Routine Tests.
All concrete ingredients and concrete mixes delivered without a certificate of an
independent approved laboratory must be tested and verified on behalf of the
Employer by an independent Agency at the expenses of the Contractor: External
Q. C. Acceptance Tests.
The same procedure as for Routine Tests (but not the frequency) shall apply to
the Acceptance Tests.

7 03

Materials

7 03 01

Cement

7 03 01 01

General
Work above Ground Level
All cement for work above ground level shall be Ordinary Portland Cement of an
approved brand.
Work below Ground Level
All cement used below ground level shall be Sulphate-resisting Portland Cement
and shall be of a brand approved by the Engineer.
If the soil investigation allows use of ASTM C 150 Type ll or Ordinary Portland
Cement, it shall be approved by the Engineer.
Limits for compressive strength of some types of cement are shown in Table 1,
further requirements for other properties are shown in Table 2.

Table 1: Minimum average compressive strength of cement.

Type
Ordinary PC
Rapid-hardening PC
Moderate sulphate-resisting PC type II
Sulphate-resisting PC type V

3 days

7 days

28 days

15 N/mm2
21 N/mm2
10 N/mm2
8 N/mm2

23 N/mm2
28 N/mm2
17 N/mm2
15 N/mm2

35 N/mm2
35 N/mm2
22 N/mm2
20 N/mm2

58
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Table 2: Limits of cement properties.


2

Specific Surface (Blaine)


Setting time
(Vicat needle)

2250 cm /gram
not less than
45 min.
not more than
10 hours
0,60 %
by weight

initial
final

Content of alkalies
(if low alkali content is required)
Heat of hydration
(if low heat of hydration is required)
Tricalcium
Aluminate
C3A = 2,65 (Al 2O3) 1,69 (Fe2O3)
Tetracalcium
Aluminaferrite
Sulphate expansion
limit after 14 days

7 03 01 02

250 kJ/kg
at 7 days

ASTM Type II
ASTM Type III
ASTM Type IV
ASTM Type V

8%
15 %
7%
5%

ASTM Type V

20 %
not more
than 0,045 %

Sampling and Testing


If the source does not change, routine tests should be carried out for each 100th,
500th or 1000th ton delivered.
If the representative sample fails any of the mandatory tests, two new samples
shall be taken from the same group and all the mandatory tests shall be carried
out on them.
The group should be considered conforming to the standard if the two new
samples pass all the repeated mandatory tests.

7 03 02

Aggregates

7 03 02 01

Properties

7 03 02 01 01

General
The chemical and physical properties as shown in Table 3 differ from those as
shown in Part 6 01 02 to 6 01 04 and the Project Specifier may select alternative
properties.
In addition to chemical and physical properties as shown in Table 3, following
limits may be applicable:
Alkali aggregate reaction:
Aggregate for use in concrete being subject to wetting, extended exposure to
humid atmosphere, or contact with moist ground shall not contain any materials
that are deleteriously reactive with the alkalis in the cement in an amount
sufficient to cause excessive expansion of mortar of concrete, except that if such
materials are present in injurious amounts, the aggregate may be used with a
cement containing less than 0.6 % alkalis calculated as sodium oxide or with the
addition of a material that has been shown to prevent harmful expansion due to
the alkali-aggregate reaction.

59
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Table 3: Alternative Limits for selected properties of aggregates.


Clause 6 01 02 through 6 01 04)

Kind of requirement

(see:

See
Note No.

Max/min permissible limit


Fines
Coarse
Not darker than standard

Organic impurities
Material
Natural
Finer
aggregate
than
Crushed
0,075 mm
aggregate
Clay lumps and friable particles
Coal and lignite

Sodium sulphate soundness

max. 5 % by weight

max. I %
by weight
max. 7 % by weight max. 1.5 %
by weight
max. 3 % by weight max. 2 %
by weight
If surface appearance or
abrasion is of importance: max.
0.5 % by weight
All other concrete: I % by weight
max. 10 %
max. 12 %

Magnesium sulphate soundness


Soluble chlorides

max. 15 %
max. 18 %
Soluble chlorides (NaC 1) max
0.10 % by weight
max 0.4 % by weight of cement
Prestressed concrete, tendons
not in ducts: max. 0.02 % by
weight

Specific gravity

min. 2300
kg/m3
max. 3 %
max. 0.4 %

Water absorption
Acid soluble sulphates,
calculated as S03
Total sulphate content

2
2
3

min. 2300
kg/m3

max 4 % by weight of cement

4
5

Notes to Table 3:
Note 1: If the colour is darker than the standard (dark yellow, brown or reddish)
the aggregates can be rejected, unless it is proved by control mix, that
the content producing that colour has no negative effect on the quality of
the concrete.
Note 2: The aggregate may be acceptable, if it meets the indicated limit for
either sodium sulphate or magnesium sulphate soundness.
Note 3: These limits apply for reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete where
the tendons are protected by ducts.
Note 4: If a proposed aggregate has an absorption of 3 % or more, the
Contractor should demonstrate by trial mixes and tests that the strength
and durability of the concrete are not adversely affected and that
adequate workability can be maintained during the placing and
compacting processes.
Note 5: Including sulphate already present in cement.

60
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Particle shape of coarse aggregate:


The content of elongated particles (length to thickness greater than 3 : 1) should
not exceed 50 % by weight.
Mechanical properties should be as follows:
Abrasion loss of gravel, crushed gravel, or crushed stone using the Los Angeles
test should not be higher than 50 %.
The 10 % fines value in accordance with BS 812, should not be less than 50 kN.
Where aggregates are to be used for concrete wearing surfaces, the 10 % fines
value shall not be less than 100 kN.
The aggregate impact value according to BS 812 should not exceed 45 %.
Where aggregates are to be used for concrete wearing surfaces, the aggregate
impact value should not exceed 30 %.

7 03 02 01 02

Sizes and Grading


The grain size distribution of the aggregate is prescribed by the grading curves,
shown in Figs. 1 to 7.

Fig. 1: Grading curves for maximum particle size 8 mm similar to SASO 378

61
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Fig. 2: Grading curves for maximum particle size 16 mm similar to SASO 378.

Fig. 3: Grading curves for maximum particle size 32 mm similar to SASO 378

62
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Fig. 4: Grading curves for maximum particle size 63 mm similar to SASO 378.

63
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Fig. 5: Grading curves for maximum particle size 9.5 mm


similar to ASTM C 33

64
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Fig. 6: Grading curves for maximum particle size 19.0 mm similar to ASTM C 33.

Fig. 7: Grading curves for maximum particle size 38.1 mm similar to ASTM C 33.
65
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Each figure must be used separately and cannot be mixed with another one.
Choosing the relevant figure depends on the maximum particle size of the mix to
be prepared.
Combined aggregates should be as coarse-grained and dense-graded as
possible and the grading curve should be located between the limits shown as
the curves A and C in Figs. 1 to 7. If the grading does not fit into the area
between the curves A and C, trial mixes have to be made to prove the suitability
of the grain size distribution which needs the approval of the Engineer.
Grading Limits:
Each figure contains three curves, which represent the grading limits of the
favourable or serviceable area respectively in percent passing by weight. The
area between curves A and B comprises the favourable grain size distribution
while the area between curves B and C is to be regarded as serviceable.
Concrete with aggregate fitting into the favourable area (grading zone (3)
requires less cement than concrete of the same strength class fitting in
serviceable area (grading zone (4)) only, the as shown for one example in Table
4.
1
Concrete
strength class

2
Grading
zone of
aggregate

14)

KS

KP

KR

140

160

160

180

190

210

230

210

230

260

240

270

300

270

300

330

280

310

340

310

340

380

B 25, for
external
10 applications

300

320

350

320

350

380

B 5 15)

2
B 10 15)
4
5

B 15

6
7

B 25, general

14)
15)

Table 4:

4
Minimum cement content,
in kg per m3,
of compacted concrete
for consistence range

See figure 3
For plain concrete only

Minimum cement content for B I concrete with aggregate of 32 mm


maximum particle size and cement strength Z 35 complying with
DIN 1164-1(acc. to DIN 1045, Table 4)

66
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Deviation:
Deviations in the grading curves, shown in Figs. 2 to 7, concerning grain sizes
above 8 mm have little effect on the properties of the concrete.
Differing Specific Gravity:
For aggregates composed of particle size fractions which differ significantly in
specific gravity, the grading curves should be referred to, not to parts by weight
of the aggregate, but to parts by absolute volume.
The absolute volume is obtained by dividing the weight of the material by the
specific gravity. The ordinates of the grading curve diagram should then be
percentage passing in % by absolute volume instead of % by weight.
Figs. 1 to 4 show the grain size distribution areas for aggregates with maximum
particle sizes of 8 mm, 16 mm, 31.5 mm and 63 mm for grading curves for metric
test sieves . The mesh sieve openings shall be according to ISO 565 (R 20/3).
Figs. 5 to 7 show the grain size distribution areas for aggregates with maximum
particle sizes of 9.5 mm, 19 mm and 38.1 mm for grading curves for inch test
sieves (US). The mesh sieve openings shall be according to ASTM E 11.

7 03 02 02

Sampling and Testing

7 03 02 02 01

Routine tests by the Contractor:


Sampling of aggregates may be done in accordance with ASTM D 75 or an
equivalent standard. The required tests shall be made on test samples that
comply with requirements of the designated test methods and are representative
of the grading that will be used in the concrete.
E. g., following routine tests could be carried out on representative samples
within the periods stated below complying with the standards indicated or
equivalent standards:
1.0 Test Frequency Each Week
- Grading - ASTM C 136 or DIN 4226.
- Determination of chloride content - BS 812, Part 4.
- Determination of sulphur trioxide content - DIN 4226.
- Determination of clay lumps and friable particles - ASTM C 142.
2.0 Test Frequency Each Two Weeks
- Amount of material finer than 0.075 mm - ASTM C 117.
3.0 Test Frequency Each Month
-.Organic impurities- ASTM C 40.
- Effect of organic impurities - ASTM C 87, if colour is darker than light yellow.
-.Determination of chloride content - BS 812 Part 4, if result is between 20 %
and 60 % of the limit.
- Determination of sulphur trioxide content - DIN 4226, Sheet 3, if result is between 20 % and 60 % of the limit.
- Particle shape - DIN 52114.
- Soundness - ASTM C 88.
- Coal and lignite - ASTM C 123.
- Water absorption - ASTM C 127.
- Specific gravity - ASTM C 127.
- Alkali reactivity - ASTM C 289.
4.0 Test Frequency each 4 Months
- 10 % fines value- BS 812.
5.0 Test Frequency each 6 Months
- Determination of chloride content - BS 812, Part 4.
- Determination of sulphur trioxide content - DIN 4226.

67
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

7 03 03

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Mixing Water
When not specified as potable, some of the following requirements could be
applied:

7 03 03 01

General
Water to be used for cooling and/or washing aggregates, and for mixing and
curing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil , acid, salt,
alkali, organic matter or other substances deleterious to concrete or
reinforcement. All water shall be tested and testing has to be approved by the
Engineer.
Mixing water shall comply with DIN 4030 or an equivalent standard.
The Contractor shall at all times maintain on the site such quantities of mixing
water as are considered by the Engineer to be sufficient to ensure continuity of
work. The water should be stored in closed water tanks and kept as cool as
possible.

7 03 03 02

Sampling and Testing


Samples shall be taken in clean bottles or containers which can be tightly closed.
The samples container shall be labeled with the following information:
- Name of supplier and source
- Name of sampler
- Date of sampling.
Requirements
(1) General Appearance
(1.1) Smell, sediments, unusual colour, foaming water, oil and grease
Control mixes have to be carried out, if
- any strange smell is perceivable,
- sediments or swimming particles can be seen,
- water has unusual colour,
- water shows foam on top or is able to produce foam,
- water has any signs of oil or grease content.
(1.2) Algae
Water containing algae is unsuited for making concrete because the algae can
cause
excessive reduction in strength either by influencing cement hydration or by
causing a large amount of air to be entrained in the concrete. Algae may also be
present on aggregates, in which case the bond between the aggregate and
cement paste
is reduced. Water containing algae shall not be used.
(2) Acceptance Tests
(2.1) Chemical Analysis
The water shall be chemically analyzed to determine the amount of the following
chemicals:
- Dissolved solids
- Alkalis
- Chloride
- Sulphate
- pH-value
Possible limits of chemical contents are shown in Table 5.

68
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

(2.2) Trial Mixes


All waters containing suspicious impurities or defects shall be checked by trial
mixes.
(3) Control Mix
Water of questionable suitability can be used for making concrete, if mortar
cubes made have 7 and 28 day strengths equal to at least 90 % of comparable
specimens made with potable water. Mortar cubes shall be made and tested
according to ASTM C 109. In addition, the Vicat needle tests as detailed in ASTM
C 191, should be made to ensure that impurities in the mixing water do not
adversely shorten or extend the setting time of the cement.

Table 5:

Limits of chemical contents in Mixing water.

Kind of Ingredients
Dissolved solids
Alkali Carbonate and Bicarbonate.
Chloride*

Permissible Limit
2000 ppm
1000 ppm
500 ppm
1000 ppm
3000 ppm
600 ppm
4 (min)

Sulphate (SO4)
Alkalies (Na2O + 0,658 K2O)
ph-Value

* The maximum concentration of chloride (Cl) in prestressed concrete should not be


higher than 500 ppm.
In general, for reinforced concrete in moist environments or concrete containing
embedded aluminum structures with dissimilar metals, a maximum concentration of
1000 ppm is acceptable.
Industrial Waste Water
Waters carrying sanitary sewage and seawater are only allowed to be used as mixing
water, if it is permitted in the Project Documents. It is permissible to re-use waste
water as mixing water in concrete, if the waste water complies with the requirements
as per item (1) through (3) above.

7 03 04

Admixtures

7 03 04 01

General
Other admixtures not mentioned in Part 2:
- Pozzuolana
- Gas former
- Damp-proofing agents
69
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

- Waterproofing agents
- Pumping aids
- Superplasticisers
- Bonding agents
- Grouting agents

7 03 04 02

Sampling and testing

7 03 04 02 01

Acceptance Tests (External Q. C.)


If manufacturer's certificate is not available, acceptance tests by control mixes
must be made to show the influence of the admixture on the following concrete
properties:
- Water content
- Slump
- Air content
- Time of setting
- Compressive strength
- Flexural strength (if required)
- Length change
- Durability factor (if relevant)
- Bleeding (only for air-entraining agent)
- Effect of under and overdosage.

7 03 05

Concrete

7 03 05 01

Mix Design and Selection of Proportions


For each class of concrete there must be as many mix designs as there are
different combinations of ingredients, anticipated to cover the requirements of the
work. Mix design may vary to meet field conditions particularly for hot weather
concreting, but after acceptance by the Engineer no changes shall be made
without notice and to the approval of the Engineer based on the Contractors
report and recommendation.
The proportions of ingredients for a design mix should be such as to produce a
mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and
around reinforcement by the methods of placing and consolidation employed in
the work, but without permitting the materials to segregate or to collect excessive
free water on the surface.
ACI 318, ACI 211 give methods for different properties of concrete mixes
necessary to meet the requirements of a specification (see Part 2: Products). The
properties of ingredients can be selected in accordance with one of the methods
to produce the proper workability, durability, strength, and other required
properties.
ENV 206 is using the method of designed or prescribed mixes.
DIN 1045 distinguishes between the composition of class C I and C II concrete,
C II concrete including concrete with special properties based on w/c-ratio. The
mix design must proof by suitability tests a certain consistence considering the
site relevant conditions.
Other generally accepted design methods may be used, if the results of the trial
mixes meet the specified requirements.

7 03 05 02

Types
Normal Weight Concrete
Normal weight concrete is a concrete for which density is not a controlling
attribute, usually having a unit weight in the range of 2100 kg per m3 to 2600 kg
per m3.
70
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Lightweight Concrete
Lightweight concrete is intentionally made to have a low density by use of
lightweight aggregates or a mixture of lightweight and normal weight aggregates,
and usually required to have an air-dry unit weight of less than 2000 kg per m3.
High Density Concrete
High density or heavyweight concrete which is generally for shielding structures
differs from normal weight concrete by having a higher density and special
compositions to improve its attenuation properties.
The use of high density concrete in construction is a specialized field; the work
must be undertaken by qualified personnel according to a special specification.
Insulating Concrete
Insulating concrete is a low density concrete, which is intentionally made to
decrease the thermal conductivity of a structure.

7 03 05 03

Concrete Quality

7 03 05 03 01

Concrete Classes
Materials for concrete are to be proportioned to ensure a plastic and workable
mixture which will result in durable concrete with the classes as shown in Tables
5 and 6.

Table 6: Concrete strength classes according to DIN 1045 (Table 1).

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Grade

Strength
class

Characteristic
strength10),wlN
(minimum
compressive
strength, w28 , of
each cube as in
subclause
7.4.3.5.2), in
N/mm2

Series strength, ws
(minimum average
compressive
strength, wm , of
each series of
cubes),
in N/mm2

Made in
compliance
with
(subclause)

B5
B 10

5
10

8
15

B 15
B 25
B 35
B 45
B 55

15
25
35
45
55

20
30
40
50
60

BI

B II

6.5.5

6.5.6

6
Application

Plain
concrete
only
Plain and
reinforced
concrete

10) The characteristic strength is based on the 5 % fractile of the population.

Strength requirements are based on 28-day compressive strength for 200 mm


cubes.
The strength requirements are to be regarded as fulfilled if the minimum average
compressive strength of each series, each comprising three consecutive cubes,
attains at least the values shown in Table 5, column 4, and the compressive
strength of each individual cube attains at least the values stated in column 3.
Further information about the 5 percent defective level (5 % fractile) are given in
CEB/FIP recommendations for the design and construction of concrete
structures.
71
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Table 7: Concrete strength classes according to Eurocode 2 and ENV 206.

Strength classes of concrete


strength
classes
1)
ckcyt
N/mm2
ckcube
2
N/mm
1)
ckcyt

C12/15

C16/20

C20/25

C25/30

C30/37

C35/45

C40/50

C45/55

C50/60

12

16

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

15

20

25

30

37

45

50

55

60

is identical with ckck used in the Eurocodes.

Strength classes of concrete related to w/c ratio


Strength class of cement

CE 32,5
CE 42,5

0,65
C20/25

0,60
C25/30

C25/30

C30/37

Water/cement ratio
0,55
0,50
C30/37
C35/45
C35/45

C40/50

0,45
C40/50
C45/55

Seven-days Strength:
The relation in percent between 7-days strength and 28-days strength has to be
determined by using the results of test specimen prepared for acceptance or
suitability tests.
Strength for Slabs on Grade:
The required compressive strengths for slabs on grade are subject to intensity of
abrasion and may be specified similar to the values given in Table 7.
Strength of Watertight Lightweight Concrete:
Lightweight concrete for such application has to be proportioned to produce a
specified compressive strength of at least 25 N/mm2 for exposure to fresh water
and of 35 N/mm2 for exposure to seawater.
Table 8: Concrete strength classes in slabs on grade.

Class

Usual Traffic

Typical Uses

Light foot

Residential or tile
covered, mosques
Offices, schools
hospitals,
residences
Drives, garage floor
and sidewalks for
residences
Light industrial
commercial
Single-course
industrial
integral topping
Two-course
heavy
72
industrial, bonded
topping

Foot

Light foot and


pneumatic
wheels
Foot and pneumatic wheels
Foot and wheels
abrasive wear
Foot and steel
Tire vehicles
Severe abrasion

Concrete
class

C 25

Maximum
slump for
normal
weight
concrete mm*
100

C35

75

Base C 25
Topping**
C 35-55 ***

100

Al LABINA / AL MANAR
25
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

*Slump not to exceed 75 mm if structural lightweight aggregates are used. All


values of slump shown are working maxima and may be exceeded by up to
25 mm for individual field batches.
**Maximum aggregate size not more than one-third the thickness of topping.
***The strength required will depend on the severity of abrasive exposure.
The range shown will cover most situations.

7 03 05 03 02

Cement and Ultrafines Content


For reinforced concrete, the minimum cement content should be 240 kg per m3
of compacted concrete if the cement has a strength of 35 N/mm2 and above, and
280 kg per m3 of compacted concrete if the cement has a strength of at least 25
N/mm2.
Concrete for external applications should have a cement content of equal to at
least 300 kg of compacted concrete.
For plain concrete, the minimum cement content should be 100 kg per m3 of
compacted concrete.
Table 9 shows the minimum cement content for B I concrete with aggregate of 63
mm maximum particle size and cement of strength class Z 35 complying with
DIN 1164, Part 1.
The ultrafines content comprises the cement, the aggregate particles of 0 - 0.25
mm size, and such additional material of this particle size range as it may be
necessary to introduce. Such additional material, if any, should consist of natural
or artificial mineral substances, comprising as far as possible a mixture of
different-sized particles, which do not soften and do not impair the durability of
the concrete.
An adequate content of ultrafine material is especially important in concrete
which has to be conveyed long distances or through pipelines, in concrete for
thin-walled densely reinforced components, and in waterproof concrete.
In general, an ultrafines content as indicated in the Table 9 is advantageous, but
it is not obligatory.

Table 9: Ultrafine content related to maximum grain size.


Maximum particle Size
of the Aggregate
mm
8
16
32
63

Content of Ultrafine particles


in 1 m3 of compacted
concrete
kg
525
450
400
325

If air-entraining agents are used, a lower ultrafines content is adequate.


The ultrafines content should, as far as possible, be limited to the amount
necessary for working the concrete, particularly if concrete properties are
required which are likely to be adversely affected by an excessive content of
73
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

ultrafine particles, such as


- Concrete with high resistance to chemical attack.
- Concrete with high wearing resistance.
- Concrete with high frost resistance.
For concrete with special properties see: DIN 1045, ref. 6.5.7.

7 03 05 04

Sampling and Testing


For each different concrete type cast per day, the following procedures and tests
should be performed:

7 03 05 04 01

Fresh Concrete
(1) Preparation of Compression Specimens
(1.1) Frequency
A minimum of
- 6 cubes per pouring day or:
- 4 cubes per 100 m3 for each class and age of concrete, to be prepared,
whichever gives a higher number or:
- sufficient number, at least 3 cubes for each member and proposed control test
for stripping time determination.
(1.2) Assembly of Moulds
In assembling the cleaned mould ready for use the joint between the sections of
the mould and between the bottom of the mould and the base plate should be
thinly coated with mould oil to prevent escape of water. The internal faces of the
assembled mould should also be thinly coated with mould oil to prevent adhesion
of the concrete.
(1.3) Filling
The test specimens should be made as soon as practicable after sampling, in
such a way as to produce full compaction of the concrete with neither
segregation nor excessive laitance.
The mould should be filled in layers approximately 50 mm deep and each layer
shall be compacted either by hand or by vibration. After the top layer has been
compacted the surface of the concrete should be finished level with the top of the
mould by means of a trowel.
(1.4) Compacting by Hand
When compacting by hand, the standard compacting bar should be used and the
strokes of the bar should be distributed in a uniform manner over the
cross-section of the mould.
The number of strokes per layer required to produce the specified condition will
vary according to the type of concrete, but in no case shall the concrete be
subjected to less than 35 strokes per layer for 150 mm cubes or 50 strokes per
layer for 200 mm cubes.
The compacting bar should be a steel bar weighing 1.8 kg, 380 mm long, and
having a ramming face 25 mm square.
(1.5) Compacting by Vibration
When compacting by vibration, each layer should be vibrated by means of the
hammer or vibrating table until the specified condition is attained.
The vibrator may be in the form of either an electric or pneumatic hammer, or a
suitable vibrating table.
(2) Curing Test Cubes
(2.1) Specimens made in the Laboratory
Immediately after they are made, the test specimens should be stored in a place
free from vibration in moist air of at least 90 % relative humidity and at a
74
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

temperature of 23 plus/minus 2 deg C for 16-24 hours from the time of adding the
water to the mix. This can be achieved by storing the specimens in their moulds,
either in a moist air curing room or cabinet maintained at the relative humidity
and temperature conditions stated, or under damp matting or other suitable damp
material covered completely with polyethylene or other similar impervious
sheeting in a room maintained at the temperature stated.
If the concrete has not achieved sufficient strength to enable demoulding to be
carried out within the stated period the demoulding should be delayed for a
further 24 hours, but this fact has to be stated in the test report. During this
further period, the specimens shall be stored in the moist air conditions stated.
The specimens should be marked for later identification, removed from the
moulds and, unless required for test within 24 hours, immediately submerged in
the tank and kept there until taken out just before testing.
One or more tanks must contain clean water, renewed at least once a month and
maintained at a temperature of 23 +/- 1 deg C in the laboratory.
Note: The tolerances are intended to allow for variations in temperature from
point to point within the tank.
The specimens shall not be allowed to become dry at any time until they are
tested.
Specimens to be tested at 24 hours should be stored for this period in the moist
air conditions stated and demoulded just before testing.
(2.2) Specimens made on Site
After preparation, the specimens should be stored, cured and demoulded and
handled according to item (2.1) above.
While the specimens remain on site, records of the daily maximum and minimum
air and water storage temperatures shall be kept with maximum and minimum
thermometers or with continuous recording instruments.
The specimens, well-packed in damp sand or wet sacks and enclosed when
necessary in a polythene bag or sealed container, should be sent to the testing
laboratory when they are not less than 3 days nor more than 7 days old, to arrive
there in a damp condition not less than 24 hours before the time of testing. On
arrival at the testing laboratory, the specimens have to be stored in water
maintained at a temperature of 23 +/- 1 deg C until the time of test. The
specimens shall not be allowed to become dry at any time until they are tested.
Specimens to be tested at 24 hours have to be stored for this period in the moist
air conditions stated and demoulded just before testing.
(2.3) Specimens for Stripping Time Determination
The test specimens have to be removed from moulds after 24 hours and have to
be stored in the structure as near as possible to the points of sampling, and shall
receive insofar as practicable the same protection during curing as given to those
portions of the structure which they represent, and shall not be removed from the
structure for transmittal to the laboratory prior to expiration of three-quarters of
the proposed period before removal of forms.
(3) Report
The following information should be included in the report on each cube:
- identification of test cube,
- particulars of the concrete from which the test cube was made, recorded in
accordance with the requirements of the appropriate clause in Part 1 of BS
1881,
- method of compaction (by hand or by vibration), and
- maximum and minimum storage temperatures.
(4) Workability Test
75
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

A minimum of
- 3 workability tests per pouring day or
- 2 tests for each 100 m3 concrete, shall be performed, whichever gives the
higher number.
(5) Fresh Concrete Temperature
(5.1) Frequency of Test
If the ambient temperature exceeds 40 deg C
- 4 temperature measurements per pouring day or
- 2 measurements per 100 m3 concrete should be taken.
(5.2) Accuracy of Thermometer
A thermometer with +/- 0.5 % accuracy should be used and immersed into
concrete batches selected at random at the time of placement.
The stabilized temperature should be read and recorded with the time of
measurement.
(6) Unit Weight (fresh concrete density)
A minimum of
- 1 unit weight determination per pouring day or
- 1 determination per 100 m3 concrete shall be made.
(7) Criteria of Technical Conformity
The test results should be within the specified limits.

7 03 05 04 02

Hardened Concrete
(1) Frequency of Testing
The frequency of testing depends on the specified test age.
(2) Age at Test
(2.1) General
Preferred ages for test are 3, 7 and 28 days, 13 weeks and 1 year.
(2.2) Tolerances
Tests should be carried out within the following tolerances: to specify
up to and including 30 hours: within +/- 1/2 hour;
above 30 hours up to and including 100 hours: within +/- 2 hours;
above 100 hours up to and including 60 days: within +/- 8 hours;
above 60 days: within +/- 1 day.
The ages should be calculated from the time of the addition of the water to the
other materials.
(3) Required Tests
- Compressive strength (half of sample number) after 7 days.
- Compressive strength (half of sample number) after 28 days.
- Determination of compressive strength for removing time for forms - if relevant.
(4) Criteria of Technical Conformity
The test results shall be equal or higher than required.
Identification
Reports of tests on materials and samples of concrete should include clear
identification of the source or batch number, specimen identification, physical
characteristics of the materials including temperature at time of sampling and
testing, ambient temperature, date and time of procurement and testing, curing
76
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

techniques for concrete if applicable, results of tests, point of incorporation of


concrete in the construction, design of concrete mix and concrete yield.

7 03 06

Batching
(1) During measurement operations, aggregates should be handled in a manner
to maintain their desired grading, and all materials should be weighed to the
tolerances required for the desired reproducibility of the concrete mix selected. In
addition to accurate weighing, also necessary for successful batching is the
proper sequencing and blending of the ingredients during charging of the mixers
to obtain uniformity and homogeneity in the concrete produced as indicated by
such physical properties as unit weight, slump, air content, strength, and air-free
mortar content in successive batches of the same mix proportions.
(2) The mix recipe for the mixes to be produced should hang within view of the
mixer operator.

7 03 06 01

Plant
Factors affecting the choice of the proper batching system are
- size of the job
- required production rate
- required standards of batching performance
The productive capacity of a plant is determined by a combination of such items
as the materials handling system, bin size, batcher size, and plant mixer size and
number.
Available equipment falls into three general categories - manual, semi-automatic,
and fully automatic.
(1) Manual batching
Manual plants are acceptable for small jobs having low batching rate
requirements, generally for jobs up to a total concrete quantity of 4000 m3 and
20 m3/h, but as the job size increases, automation of batching operations is
rapidly justified.
(2) Semi-automatic batching
In this system, aggregate bin gates for charging batchers are opened by
manually operated push buttons or switches. Gates are closed automatically
when the designated weight of material has been delivered. With satisfactory
plant maintenance the batching accuracy will meet the required tolerances.
(3) Automatic batching
Automatic batching of all materials is electrically activated by a single starter
switch. However, interlocks shall interrupt the batching cycle when the scale has
not returned to +/- 0.3 %t of zero balance or when weighing tolerances as
specified are exceeded.
(4) Bins and Weigh Batchers
Batch plant bins should be of adequate size to effectively accommodate the
productive capacity of the plant. Compartments in bins should adequately
separate the various concrete materials, and the shape and arrangement of
aggregate bins should prevent aggregate segregation and leakage.
Weigh batchers should be charged with easy-operating clam shell or undercut
radial-type bin gates. Gates used to charge semi-automatic and fully automatic
batchers must be power operated and equipped with a suitable "dribble" control
to obtain the desired weighing accuracy. Weigh batchers must be accessible for
obtaining representative samples, and they shall be arranged to obtain the
proper sequencing and blending of aggregates during charging of the mixer.
77
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

7 03 07

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Mixing
Thorough mixing is essential for production of uniform concrete. Therefore,
equipment and methods used should be capable of effectively mixing concrete
materials containing the largest specified aggregate to produce uniform mixes of
the lowest slump practical for the work. Sufficient mixing as well as transporting
and placing capacity should be provided so that unfinished concrete lifts can be
maintained plastic and free from cold joints.

7 03 07 01

Charging Concrete Materials


Each batch should be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter before
cement and aggregates. Controls shall be provided to prevent batched
ingredients from entering the mixer before the previous batch has been
completely discharged.
It is preferable that cement being charged with other materials, but it should enter
the stream after approximately 10 percent of the aggregate is in the mixer. When
it is necessary to charge cement into truck mixers separately, additional mixing
time may be required to obtain desired mix uniformity. Water should enter the
mixer first with continuous flow while other ingredients are entering the mixer.
Water charging pipes must be of proper design and of sufficient size so that
water enters at a point well inside the mixer and charging complete within the first
25 % of the mixing time.

7 03 07 02

Charging Admixtures
Admixtures shall be charged to the mixer at the same point in the mixing
sequence batch after batch. Liquid admixtures shall be charged with the water,
and powdered admixtures shall be spread into the mixer with other dry
ingredients. When more than one admixture is used, each shall be batched
separately and they shall not be premixed before entering the mixer.
If the manufacturer's instructions indicate different procedures, they shall be
applied.

7 03 07 03

Mixing Time for Stationary Mixers


The mixing time required should be based upon the ability of the mixer to
produce uniform concrete throughout the batch and from batch to batch.
Manufacturer's recommendations and usual specifications, such as 1 min for
0.75 m3 plus 15 s for each additional 0.75 m3 of capacity in case of compulsory
type mixer can be used as satisfactory guides for establishing initial mixing time.
If gravity batch mixers are used, each batch should be mixed for at least 2
minutes.
However, final mixing times used should be based on the results of mixer
performance tests made at frequent intervals throughout the life of the job.
The mixing time shall be measured from the time all ingredients are in the mixer.
Batch timers with audible indicators used in combination with interlocks which
prevent mixer discharge prior to completion of a preset mixing time shall be
provided on automatic plants and are also desirable on manual plants. The mixer
must be designed for starting and stopping under full load.

7 03 07 04

Mixer Performance
The performance of mixers is usually determined by a series of uniformity tests
made on samples taken from two to three locations within the concrete batch
being mixed for a given time period. Mixer performance requirements are based
on allowable differences in test results between any two locations or in
differences between individual locations and the average of all locations.
Among the many tests used to check mixer performance, the following are the
most common and necessary:
78
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

- air content
- slump
- unit weight of air-free mortar
- compressive strength
- water content of mortar
- cement content of dried mortar
- coarse aggregate content
Another important aspect of mixer performance is batch-to-batch uniformity of the
concrete which is also largely affected by the uniformity of materials and their
measurement as well as by the efficiency of the mixer. Visual observation of the
concrete during mixing and discharge from the mixer is an important aid in maintaining a uniform mix, particularly uniform consistency.

7 03 07 05

Uniformity
The concrete should be discharged at the normal operating rate for the mixer,
with care being exercised not to obstruct or retard the discharge by an
incompletely opened gate or seal.
The following requirements have to be fulfilled, expressed as maximum
permissible difference in results of tests of samples taken from two locations (one
after 15 % discharge and the second after 85 % of discharge of the load) in the
concrete batch.
(1) Unit Weight
The weight per cubic metre calculated to an air-free basis should not differ by
more than 25 kg/m3.
(2) Slump
If the average slump is 100 mm or less the difference should not be greater than
25 mm. If the average slump is between 100 and 150 mm, the difference shall
not be greater than 35 mm.
(3) Coarse Aggregate Content
The percentage of coarse aggregate difference as a proportion by weight of each
sample retained on a 4.75 mm sieve should not exceed 8.0 %.
(4) Unit Weight of Air-free Mortar
The percentage of the difference of unit weight of air-free mortar based on
average for all comparative samples tested, should not exceed 2.5 %.
(5) Compressive Strength
The compressive strength at 7 days for each sample, based on the average
strength of all comparative test specimen should have no greater difference than
7.5 %.

7 03 07 06

Mix Temperature
Batch-to-batch uniformity of concrete from a mixer, particularly with regard to
slump, water requirement, and air content also depends on the uniformity of the
concrete temperature. It is, therefore, important that maximum and minimum concrete temperatures be controlled throughout all seasons of the year.

7 03 07 07

Discharge of Mixer
Mixers must be capable of discharging concrete of the lowest slump suitable for
the structure being worked without segregation (separation of coarse aggregate
from the mortar). Segregation shall also be avoided in handling and discharging
operations in batch plant holding hoppers and transfer conveyances.

79
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

7 03 07 08

Truck-mixed Concrete

7 03 07 08 01

Uniformity
For concrete to be completely mixed in a truck mixer, 70 or 100 revolutions at the
mixing speed designated by the manufacturer to produce the uniformity of
concrete indicated are necessary.
Concrete uniformity tests have to be made in accordance with ASTM C 94 and if
the requirements for uniformity of concrete are not met with by 100 revolutions of
mixing after all ingredients, including water, are in the drum, that mixer shall not
be used until the condition is corrected.
When satisfactory performance is found in one mixer, the performance of mixers
of substantially the same design and condition of blades may be regarded as
satisfactory.
Additional revolutions of the mixer beyond the number found to produce the
required uniformity of concrete shall be at a designated agitating speed.

7 03 07 08 02

Truck Mixer Used for Transport


When a truck mixer or truck agitator is used for transporting concrete that has
been completely mixed in a stationary mixer, any turning during transportation
shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment.
When a truck mixer or agitator is approved for mixing or delivery of concrete, no
water from the truck water system or elsewhere shall be added after the initial
introduction of mixing water for the batch except when on arrival at the job site
the slump of the concrete is less than specified. Such additional water to bring
the slump within required limits shall be injected into the mixer under such
pressure and direction of flow that the requirements for uniformity specified are
met with.
The drum or blades should be turned an additional 30 revolutions or more, if
necessary, at mixing speed, until the uniformity of the concrete is within the
limits.
Water should not be added to the batch at any later time.

7 03 07 08 03

Time of Discharge
Discharge of the concrete should be completed within 1 hour or before the drum
has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first, after the introduction of the
mixing water to the cement and aggregates or the introduction of the cement to
the aggregates. These limitations may be waived by the Engineer if the concrete
is of such slump after 1 hour time or the 300 revolution limit has been reached
that it can be placed without the addition of water to the batch.
In hot weather, or under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the
concrete, a time less than 1 hour may be accepted by the Engineer.
When the concrete temperature exceeds 30 deg C, the time should be reduced
to 30 minutes.
Every effort must be made to maintain the temperature of concrete produced
during hot weather as low as possible.

7 04

Depositing of Concrete

7 04 01

Equipment

7 04 01 01

General
Concrete should be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly
as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients
80
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

and in a manner which will ensure that the specified quality of concrete is
maintained .
Placing equipment should be of a size and design such that detectable setting of
concrete could not occur before adjacent concrete is placed.

7 04 01 02

Belt Conveyors
Belt conveyors should be horizontal or at a slope which will not cause excessive
segregation or loss of ingredients.
Mortar is not be allowed to adhere to the return length of the belt. Long runs shall
be discharged into a hopper or through a baffle.

7 04 01 03

Pumps
Pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment should be of suitable kind with
adequate pumping capacity.
The loss of slump in pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment should not
exceed 50 mm. Concrete should not be conveyed through pipes made of
aluminum or aluminum alloy.

7 04 01 04

Bucket Sand Hoppers


Discharge gates should have a clear opening equal to not less than one-third the
maximum interior horizontal area or five times the maximum aggregate size
being used.
Side slopes should be steep, being not less than 60 deg to the horizontal.
Controls on the gates must permit personnel on the placement to open and close
them during any portion of the discharge cycle.
Principles of filling and discharging, using vertical falls free from obstructions,
should be followed when using buckets and hoppers.
Contamination must be prevented by landing buckets on platforms, and not
swinging them over freshly finished uncovered concrete.
Spilled concrete should not be shoveled back into buckets and hoppers for
subsequent use.

7 04 01 05

Manual or Motor Propelled Buggies


Provide smooth rigid runways in order to prevent segregation of concrete materials
in transit.

7 04 01 06

Chutes and Drop Pipes


They shall be made of metal or have a metal lining.
The bottom shall be round and they shall have sufficient capacity to avoid
overflow.
The slope should be constant and steep enough to permit concrete of the slump
required in place to flow continuously down the chute without segregation.
The flow of the concrete at the end of the chute should be controlled to prevent
segregation and long open chutes shall be covered to prevent drying and slump
loss.
Drop pipes should be of circular shape.
The pipe should have a diameter of at least eight times the maximum aggregate
size at the top but may be tapered to approximately six times the maximum
aggregate size below.
It should be plumb, secure, and positioned so that the concrete will drop vertically.
81
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

The placement should start by coating the pipe with a batch of mortar grout prior to
depositing the first concrete.

7 04 02

Weather Considerations

7 04 02 01

Hot Weather Concreting

7 04 02 01 01

Preparation Before Concreting


If concrete temperatures are expected to exceed 35 deg C, preparation must be
made to mix, transport, place, and consolidate and finish the concrete as quickly
as possible.
(1) Concrete Delivery ScheduIe
(2) Equipment Capacity
Equipment for placing the concrete must have adequate capacity to service and
cover the job so there will be no delays at distant portions of the work.
There must be ample vibration equipment and manpower to consolidate the
concrete quickly after placement and to maintain the rate of placement in difficult
areas. All equipment should be in first-class operating condition.
(3) Stand-by Equipment
Due to more rapid slump loss in hot weather, the strain on vibrating equipment
will be greater. Accordingly, provision should be made for an ample number of
stand-by vibrators, one stand-by for each three vibrators in use. A concrete
placing operation is in serious trouble, especially in hot weather, when vibration
equipment fails and the stand-by equipment is inadequate.
(4) Windbreaks, Fogging
In any event, the job should be equipped with ample water supply, hose, and fog
nozzles. The subgrade should be moist, but free of standing water and soft spots
at the time of concreting.
Fogging can be used to cool the forms and steel prior to placing concrete; and to
cool and moisten surrounding air to prevent excessive evaporation during
finishing.
Fog nozzles for this use should produce a fog blanket.
(5) Cooling and Shading of Equipment
Mixers, belts, pump lines, and chutes shall be shaded.
Where they cannot be shaded, they will absorb appreciably less heat from the
sun if painted white and kept clean. Pump lines and other surfaces can be kept
appreciably cooler by covering them with damp burlap.
(6) Temperature of Formwork and Reinforcement
The formwork and reinforcing bars should be shaded from the direct rays of the
sun prior to concrete placement so that the concrete, formwork and reinforcing
bars are not warmer than the ambient air temperature. If the temperature of
formwork and reinforcing bars is less than 38 deg C at the time of concrete
placement, shading prior to placement is not required.
(7) Cooling Concrete Materials
Water should be kept in a cool place, preferably in underground tanks. If this is
not possible, water should be chilled with ice or cooled down by any cooling
device.
(8) Protection

82
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

To avoid serious damage and cracking, any proper method for protecting
exposed surfaces from drying in hot weather shall be provided.
For most concrete works water curing should preferably be applied. White
membrane coating may be more practical than others in treating vast areas on
subgrade in the form of road pavements and canal lining, in accordance with
ASTM C 309 Specifications for liquid membrane.
Water curing must be continuous and all exposed surfaces should be covered.

7 04 02 01 02

Fresh Concrete Temperature Measurement


Three random temperature readings should be made for every 50 cubic metres
of concrete placed or fraction thereof. These readings are to be recorded.
Increased frequency of testing concrete temperature during exceptionally hot
weather conditions may be directed by the Engineer.
Decreased frequency of testing may be authorized by the Engineer if the ambient
air temperature and the previously tested concrete temperature do not exceed 35
deg C.

7 04 02 01 03

Rate of Temperature Change


Changes in temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the concrete
during and immediately following the curing period should be kept as uniform as
possible and should not exceed 3 deg C in any 1 hour or 30 deg in any 24 hour
period.

7 04 02 01 04

Concrete Casting and Finishing


Casted concrete surfaces should be finished as soon as possible, and the
casting and finishing should be executed quickly during hot weather.
Arrangements must be taken to cast concrete in the forms at a speed conforming
to the available and necessary supplies, incorporating labour and equipment to
finalize compacting and finishing works.
The rate of casting should be in accordance with the numbers of available labour
on site. Any inconsistency in this regard will lead to cold joints, poor consolidation
and irregular finished surfaces.

7 04 02 01 05

Construction Joints, Carbonate Coatings


Preparation for placing includes proper location and preparation of construction
joints. In hot weather, due to faster setting and hardening of the concrete, the
timing of clean-up by various methods is essential.
It must also be noted that hot weather increases the formation of carbonate
coatings on joint surfaces. For this reason, sandblasting or high pressure water
cleaning immediately prior to placement of concrete, are most likely to provide
the clean, fresh joint surface that is conducive to a full bond with the new
concrete.

7 04 02 02

Cold Weather Concreting


When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than 4 degrees C, the
temperature of the concrete should be maintained between 10 and 21 deg C for
the required curing time of Clause 3 03 01 20 54.
When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering, insulating, or housing the
concrete work may be made in advance of placement and should be adequate to
maintain the required temperature without injury due to concentration of heat.
Combustion heaters should not be used which expose the concrete to exhaust
gases which contain carbon dioxide.

83
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

7 04 03

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Placing
The rate of placement has to be rapid enough by providing enough staff and
equipment so that the layer of concrete is plastic when a new layer is placed
upon it in order to avoid flow lines, seams, and planes of weakness.

7 04 03 01

Avoidance of Bleeding of Water


When concrete is placed in tall forms at a fairly rapid rate, there is likely to be
some bleeding of water to the top surface, especially with non-air-entrained concrete. Bleeding can be reduced by placing more slowly and by using concrete of
a stiffer consistency.
When practical, concrete should be placed to a level about 300 mm below the
top of tall forms and should then be allowed to settle. Placing must be resumed
before the surface hardens to avoid formation of cold joints.
It is good practice to overfill the form by 25 mm and cut off the excess concrete
after it has partly stiffened.
Another means of controlling the accumulation of bleed water is to increase the
amount of coarse aggregate in the mixture as the placement approaches the top
of the lift.

7 04 03 02

Avoidance of Cracking due to Settlement


To avoid cracking due to settlement, concrete in columns and walls shall be
allowed to stand for at least two hours, and preferably overnight, before concrete
is placed in any slabs, beams, or girders framing into them. Haunches and
column capitals are considered part of the floor or roof and shall be placed
integrally with them.

7 04 04

Consolidation
The method chosen depends on the consistency of the mix and the placing
conditions, such as complexity of the formwork and amount of reinforcement.

7 04 04 01

Use of Internal Vibrators


It should penetrate quickly to the bottom of the layer being placed and at least
150 mm into any preceding layer. (In thin slabs, the vibrator should be inserted at
an angle or horizontally, if need be, so that the head is fully embedded.)
The vibrator should be held stationary for 5 to 15 seconds until adequate
consolidation is attained, and then slowly withdrawn.
The concrete should move to fill the hole left by the vibrator. If the hole does not
refill, reinsertion of the vibrator at a nearby point should solve the problem.
Allowing a vibrator to remain immersed in concrete after the paste accumulates
over the head is bad practice and results in non-uniformity.

7 04 04 02

External Vibration
External vibrators can be form vibrators, vibrating tables, or surface vibrators
such as vibrating screeds, plate vibrators, vibrator roller screeds, or vibrator hand
floats or trowels.
Form vibrators, designed to be securely attached to the outside of the forms, are
especially useful
- for consolidating concrete in members that are very thin or congested with
reinforcement;
- to supplement internal vibration and
- where internal vibrators cannot be used.

84
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Rather, the vibrator should be attached to a steel plate that in turn is attached to
steel-beams or channels, passing through the form stiffeners themselves in a
continuous run.
Form vibrators should be spaced to distribute the intensity of vibration uniformly
over the form. It is recommended that form vibrators be equipped with controls to
regulate their frequency and amplitude.
Form vibrators should not be applied within the top area of vertical forms.
In heavily reinforced sections where an internal vibrator cannot be inserted, it is
sometimes helpful to vibrate the reinforcing bars by attaching a form vibrator to
their exposed portions.
Surface vibrators such as vibrating screeds are used to consolidate concrete in
floors and other slab work, this equipment should not be used on concrete with
slumps in excess of 75 mm.
Surface vibrators should not be operated after the concrete has been adequately
consolidated.

7 04 05

Bonding

7 04 05 01

General
When fresh concrete is placed on hardened concrete, certain precautions must
be taken to secure a well bonded, watertight joint. The hardened concrete must
be clean, moist, fairly level, and reasonably rough with some coarse aggregate
particles exposed. Any laitance, soft mortar, dirt, wood chips, form oil, or other
foreign materials should be removed from the top surface of the hardened
concrete since they would interfere with proper bonding of the subsequent
placement.
At horizontal construction joints, the surface of the lower layer can be prepared
either before or after the concrete hardens. When the concrete against which
new concrete will be placed is less than about 4 hours old, all that is needed is to
remove any laitance, loose particles, and dirt.

7 04 05 02

Roughening
When the existing concrete is older, the surface should be thoroughly cleaned to
remove all surface films and deposits. This may require roughening with a
chipping hammer, water jet, or sandblasting. Fresher concrete may only require
stiff-wire brushing.

7 04 05 03

Grouting
This method has been removed from ACI 318 (ref. Commentary R.6.4.2) and
should not be recommended:
For two-course floors, the top surface of the base slab can be roughened, just
before it sets, with a steel or stiff-fibre broom. The surface should be level,
heavily scored, and free of laitance. It must then be protected until it is thoroughly
cleaned just before the grout coat and top course are placed. The grout, which is
a mixture of Portland cement, sand and water, should have a consistency of thick
paint and should be scrubbed into the surface of the slab close ahead of the top
course.
The grout should be as thick as possible on vertical surfaces and 10 mm thick on
horizontal surfaces. The fresh concrete should be placed before the grout has
attained its initial set.

7 04 05 04

Overfill and Removing of Excess Concrete


In wall construction and other reinforced concrete work, good results have been
obtained by constructing the forms to the level of the joint, overfilling the forms 25
85
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

to 50 mm, and then removing the excess concrete just before setting occurs. The
top surface then can be roughened with stiff brushes.

7 04 06

Finishing

7 04 06 01

Concrete Slabs

7 04 06 01 01

General
Detailed recommendations are given in 'Concrete Floors on Ground', Portland
Cement Association publication EB 075 D, 1978.
Various colours and textures, such as an impressed pattern or exposedaggregate surface, may be called for. Some surfaces may require only strike-off
and screeding to proper contour and elevation, while for other surfaces a
broomed, floated, or trowelled finish shall be specified in the Project Documents.
(1.1) Preparation
see: 02200 Earthwork
(1.2) Execution
The mixing, transporting, and handling of concrete for slabs must be carefully
coordinated with the finishing operations. Concrete shall not to be placed on the
subgrade or forms more rapidly than it can be spread, struck off, consolidated,
and bullfloated or darby floated. In fact, concrete shall not be spread over too
large an area before strike-off, nor shall a large area be struck off and bleed
water allowed to accumulate before bull floating or darby floating.
Finishing crews must be large enough to correctly place, finish, and cure
concrete slabs with due regard to the effects of concrete temperature and
atmospheric conditions on the setting time of the concrete and the size of the
placement to be completed .

7 04 06 01 02

Strike-Off (Screed)
(2.1) General
Strike-off or screeding is the process of striking off excess concrete to bring the
top surface to proper grade. The template used in the manual method is called a
straightedge although the lower edge may be straight or curved, depending on
the surface specified.
(2.2) Execution
It shall be moved across the concrete with a sawing motion and advanced
forward a short distance with each movement. There shall not be a surplus of
concrete against the front face of the straightedge as it passes over the slab;
allowing too great a surplus, however, may tend to leave hollows. Beam
straightedges are sometimes equipped with vibrators that consolidate the
concrete and assist in reducing the strike-off work.

7 04 06 01 03

Bull floating or Darby floating


To eliminate high and low spots and to embed large aggregate particles, a bull
float or darby shall be used immediately after strike-off. The long-handle bull float
can be used on areas too large to reach with a short-handle darby. For normal
concrete these tools shall preferably be made of wood; for air-entrained concrete
they can be of aluminum or magnesium alloy.
One of the principal causes of surface defects in concrete slabs is finishing while
bleed water is on the surface.
The use of low-slump, air-entrained concrete with an adequate cement content
and properly graded fine aggregate will minimize bleeding and help ensure
maintenance-free slabs.
86
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

On most slabs bull floating or darby floating is followed by one or more of the
following operations: edging, jointing, floating, trowelling and brooming. A slight
hardening of the concrete is necessary before any of these operations can begin.
When the bleed-water sheen has evaporated and the concrete will sustain foot
pressure with only a slight indentation, the surface is ready for final finishing.

7 04 06 01 04

Edging and Jointing


Edging is required along all isolation and construction joints in floors and outdoor
slabs such as walks, drives, and patios. Edging densifyes and compacts the
concrete slab next to the form where floating and trowelling are less effective,
making it more durable and less vulnerable to spalling and chipping.
In the edging operation, the concrete shall be cut away from the form to a depth
of 25 mm with a pointed mason trowel or a margin trowel. Then an edger has to
be held flat on the surface and run with the front slightly raised to prevent digging
into the surface. Caution is necessary to prevent the edger from leaving too deep
an impression. Edging may be required after each subsequent finishing
operation.
Right after or during the edging operation, the slab should be jointed. Proper
jointing practice can eliminate unsightly random cracks. Control joints are made
with a hand groover, power saw, or by inserting strips of plastic, wood, metal, or
preformed joint material into the plastic concrete.

7 04 06 01 05

Floating
After the concrete has been edged and jointed, it should be floated with wood or
metal hand floats or with a finishing machine using floating blades.
Floating produces a relatively even (but not smooth) texture that has good slip
resistance and is often used as a final finish, especially for exterior slabs. Where
such a finish is desired, it may be necessary to float the surface a second time
after it has partially hardened.
Marks left by edgers and hand groovers are normally removed during floating
unless they are desired for decorative purposes, in which case those tools shall
be re-run after final floating.

7 04 06 01 06

Trowelling
Where a smooth, hard, dense surface is desired, floating should be followed by
steel trowelling. Trowelling shall never be done on a surface that has not been
floated; trowelling after only bull floating or darby floating is not an adequate
procedure.
It is customary when hand-finishing large slabs to float and immediately trowel an
area before moving the kneeboards. These operations may be delayed until after
the concrete has hardened enough so that water and fine material are not
brought to the surface. Too long a delay, of course, will result in a surface that is
too hard to float and trowel. The tendency, however, is to float and trowel the
surface too soon while the concrete is too soft and plastic. Premature floating
and toweling can cause scaling, crazing, or dusting and will result in a surface
with reduced wear resistance.
Spreading dry cement on a wet surface to take up excess water is bad practice
and can cause crazing. Such wet spots shall be avoided, if possible, by
adjustments in aggregate gradation, mix proportions, and consistency. When wet
spots do occur, finishing operations shall be delayed until the water either
evaporates or is removed when a rubber floor squeegee is used, care must be
taken so that no cement is removed with the water.
The first trowelling may produce the desired surface free of defects. However,
surface smoothness, density and wear resistance can all be improved by
additional trowellings. There should be a lapse of time between successive
87
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

trowellings to permit the concrete to become harder. As the surface stiffens, each
successive trowelling shall be made with smaller trowels, using progressively
more tilt on the trowel blade. The final pass should make a ringing sound as the
trowel moves over the hardening surface.
When the first trowelling is done by machine, at least one additional trowelling by
hand should be done to remove small irregularities. If necessary, tooled edges at
joints shall be re-run after trowelling to maintain uniformity and true lines.

7 04 06 01 07

Brooming
A slip-resistant surface can be produced by brooming before the concrete has
thoroughly hardened, but it shall be sufficiently hard to retain the scoring. Rough
scoring can be achieved with a rake, a steel-wire broom or a stiff, coarse, fiber
broom; such scratching usually follows floating. If a finer texture is desired, the
concrete shall be floated, trowelled to a smooth surface, and then brushed with a
soft-bristled broom. Best results are obtained with a broom that is specially made
for texturing concrete. Slabs are usually broomed transversely to the main
direction of traffic.

7 04 06 01 08

Patterns and Textures


A variety of patterns and textures can be used to produce decorative finishes.
Patterns can be formed with dividing strips or by scoring or stamping the surface
just before the concrete hardens. Textures can be produced by little effort and
expense with floats, trowels, and brooms while more elaborate textures can be
achieved with special techniques using a mortar dash bond coat.
An exposed-aggregate finish provides a rugged, attractive surface. Selected
aggregates shall be evenly distributed on the surface immediately after the slab
has been bull floated or darby floated. Flat or elongated aggregate particles shall
not be used since they could be dislodged while being exposed.
Aggregates to be exposed shall be washed thoroughly before use to assure
satisfactory bond. The aggregate particles must be completely embedded in the
concrete. This can be done be lightly tapping them with a wooden hand float (a
darby), or the broad side of a piece of 50 x 100 mm lumber; then, when the
concrete can support a finisher on kneeboards, the surface shall be hand-floated
with a magnesium float or darby until the mortar completely surrounds and
slightly covers all the aggregate particles. When the concrete has hardened
sufficiently, the aggregate shall be exposed by simultaneously brushing and
flushing with water.
Since timing is important, test panels shall be made to determine the correct time
for exposing the aggregate without dislodging the particles. On large jobs, a reliable retarder can be sprayed or brushed on the surface immediately after
floating, but on small jobs this may not be necessary.

7 04 06 02

Formed Surfaces

7 04 06 02 01

General
Formed surfaces exposed to view or painted should be true and well defined,
smooth, free of form marks, and should have surface blemishes and
imperfections finished to match adjoining concrete in colour and texture.
Many formed concrete surfaces require little or no additional treatment when they
are carefully made with the proper forming materials or form liners. These
surfaces are divided into two general classes: smooth and textured or patterned.
The smooth surfaces are produced with plastic-coated forms, steel forms,
fibreglass reinforced plastic forms, or tempered hardboard forms. Textured or
patterned surfaces are achieved with rough-sawn timber, special grades and
textures of plywood, form liners, or by fracturing the projections of a striated
surface.
88
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

7 04 06 02 02

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

As-cast Finishes
As-cast finishes require patching of tie holes and defects, but the surfaces
otherwise need no further work since texture and finish are imparted by the
forms.

7 04 06 02 03

Smooth Form Finish


For a smooth form finish, it is important to arrange the smooth-faced forming
material and tie rods in a symmetrical pattern. Smooth-finish forms must be
supported so that they are capable of preventing excessive deflections.

7 04 06 02 04

Smooth Rubbed Finish


A smooth rubbed finish is produced on a newly hardened concrete surface no
later than the day following form removal. The forms are removed and necessary
patching completed as soon as possible after concrete placement without
jeopardizing the structure. The surface is wetted and rubbed with a carborundum
brick or other abrasive until a satisfactory uniform colour and texture are
produced.

7 04 06 02 05

Sandblast Finish
All exposed surfaces of precast concrete specified to receive a sandblast finish
shall have uniform appearance similar in all respects to that finish produced on
the approved sample panel.
The degree of blast is one which will on a sparse basis reveal the edges of some
of the coarse particles. Surfaces shall receive what is generally termed a "light
sandblast" finish.

7 04 06 02 06

Defects
Defects in surfaces which will be exposed to view such as migrated entrained air,
entrapped air bubbles over 5 mm diameter, sand streaks, staining, lack of
uniformity of color, blotches, form leakage, ridges, honeycomb, and physical
damage may be cause for rejection.

7 04 06 03

Special Architectural Finishes

7 04 06 03 01

Textured Finishes
Linear panels may be secured in forms by cementing or stapling, but not by
methods which will permit impressions of nail heads, screw heads, washers, or
the like to be imparted to the surface of the concrete.
Edges of textured panels should be sealed to each other or to divider strips (if
specified or shown) to prevent bleeding of grout. The sealant used should be
non-staining to the surface.

7 04 06 03 02

Aggregate Transfer Finishes


Aggregate transfer and other special finishes should be produced using methods
and materials designated in the Project Documents in such a way as to duplicate
sample panels prepared in advance.

7 04 06 03 03

Exposed Aggregate Finishes


The surface should be produced in such a way as to duplicate a sample panel
prepared in advance. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval
prior to placement the intended procedure, such as use of gap-graded mixtures
or pre-placed aggregates or others, by means of which uniform distribution of the
exposed aggregate will be achieved.

7 04 06 03 04

Scrubbed Finish
If portions of the surface have become too hard to permit uniform aggregate
exposure, dilute hydrochloric acid (commercial muriatic acid diluted with 4 to 10
89
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

parts water) may be used to remove the excess after the concrete is at least 2
weeks old. The acids shall be removed from the finished surface with clean water
within 15 minutes after application.
(CAUTION: Muriatic acid is hazardous. Workmen performing this operation
should wear protective goggles and rubber gloves, and should take necessary
precautions to prevent contact of the acid with the skin. If the acid comes in
contact with the skin, the affected area shall be immediately flushed with large
quantities of fresh water.)

7 04 06 03 05

Sand Blast Finish and Tooled Finish


The depth of penetration of the finish should be specified by one of the following
criteria:
a)
Remove only the surface mortar.
b)
Remove sufficient mortar to expose the coarse aggregate to the
specified depth (for sand blast) or to fracture the coarse aggregate (for tooled
finish).

7 04 06 04

Grout Clean-up
A grout clean-up may be used to give a uniform colour and appearance to a
smooth surface. After defects have been repaired, the surface shall be saturated
thoroughly with water and kept wet during grout operations.
A grout of 1 part Portland cement and 1 1/2 to 2 parts of fine sand may all be
applied uniformly by brush, plasterer's trowel, or rubber float to completely fill air
bubbles and holes.
White Portland cement can be used for part or all of the cement in the grout to
match the colour of the existing concrete. The surface shall be vigorously floated
with a wood, sponge, rubber, or cork float immediately after applying the grout to
fill any small air holes (bug holes) that are left and to remove some excess grout.
The excess grout shall be scraped off with a sponge rubber float.
If possible, work should be done in the shade and preferably during cool, damp
weather. During hot or dry weather, the concrete can be kept moist with a fine
fog spray during the grout clean-up.
The completed surface should be moist-cured by keeping the area wet the entire
day following the clean-up. When completely dry, the surface shall have a
uniform colour and texture.

7 05

Concrete Curing

7 05 01

Curing Methods and Materials

7 05 01 01

Water Curing
The economics of the method selected for water curing should be considered for
each job since the availability of water, labour, curing materials, and such items
for the job in question will influence the selection. The method selected must
provide a complete cover of water meeting the requirements of mixing water and,
where appearance is to be a factor, the water must be free of substances that will
stain or discolour the concrete. Common methods of water curing are described
in the following Clauses.
(1) Ponding or Immersion
The most thorough but seldom used method of water curing consists of total
immersion of the finished concrete unit in water. "Ponding" is sometimes used for
slabs such as culvert or bridge floors, pavements, flat roofs, or wherever a pond
of water can be easily created by a ridge or dyke of impervious earth or other
material at the edge of the slab, or where there is a stream of water as through a
culvert.
90
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Damage from untimely or sudden release of ponded water shall be avoided. For
example, if the ponded water leaks out, the slab would not get proper curing and
the water might soften the supporting soil, or damage other construction or
objects.
Curing water should not be more than about 10 deg C cooler than the concrete,
because of temperature-change stresses which would be introduced with
resultant cracking.
(2) Fog Spraying or Sprinkling
Fog spraying or sprinkling with nozzles provides excellent curing when
temperature is well above freezing. When higher temperatures than normal
atmospheric are permissible as in products plant curing, steam at atmospheric
pressure is used and if properly controlled will maintain a film of moisture on the
concrete surfaces during curing.
Lawn sprinklers are effective where water run-off is of no concern. The
disadvantage of sprinkling is the cost of the water unless there is an ample
supply available . Intermittent sprinkling is not acceptable if there is drying of the
concrete surface.
Soaking hoses are useful, especially on surfaces that are vertical or nearly so.
Care must be taken that erosion of the surface does not occur.
(3) Burlap, Cotton Mats and Rugs
Burlap, cotton mats, rugs and other coverings of absorbent materials will hold
water on the surface, whether horizontal or vertical. Burlap must be free of sizing
or any substances that are injurious to Portland cement or cause discolouration.
New burlap shall be thoroughly rinsed in water to remove soluble substances and
make the burlap more absorbent.
Burlap is available that has been treated to resist rot and fire (properties of
interest when damp or dry burlap is to be stored between jobs). The heavier the
weight of burlap, the more water it will hold and the less frequently it will need to
be wetted.
Double thickness may be used advantageously. Lapping the strips by half widths
when placing will give greater moisture retention and aid in preventing
displacement of the burlap during high wind or heavy rain.
Cotton mats and rugs hold water longer than burlap with less risk of inadequate
curing. They are handled much the same as burlap except that due to their
greater weight, application to a freshly finished surface must wait until the
concrete has stiffened to a greater degree than for burlap. Usually initial curing
with a light burlap, or impermeable sheet, is applied for a few hours before
placing the heavier wet cotton mats.
(4) Earth Curing
Wet earth curing has been used effectively, both on comparatively small jobs of
slab or floor work, and on highway pavements. The earth shall be free of
particles larger than 25 mm, and shall not have organic matter or other
substances that will damage the cement by retarding or destroying its setting
properties.
(5) Sand and Sawdust
Wet clean sand and sawdust are used in the same manner as earth curing.
Sawdust from woods containing too much tannic acid, such as oak, shall not be
used for curing, but other types of wood are acceptable. These clean, granular
materials are especially useful where carpenters and form setters must work on
the surface since such coverings help to protect the surface against scars and
stains.
91
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

(6) Straw or Hay


Wet straw can be used but there is always the danger that wind may remove it
unless it is held down with screen wire, burlap or other means. There is also the
danger of fire if the straw is allowed to become dry. Such vegetable fibres may
cause discolouration of the surface for several months after removal. The layer
shall be at least 150 mm thick.

7 05 01 02

Sealing Materials
Sealing materials are sheets or membranes placed on concrete to reduce the
loss of mixing water from the concrete. Although not necessarily as effective as
the application of water throughout the curing period, there are advantages in the
use of sealing materials for curing that make their use preferable under many
conditions. For example, if the moisture is sealed in, there is less likelihood of
deficient curing due to negligence in keeping the covering wet. Also sealing
materials are often less costly and are easier to handle and can be applied
earlier, often without any other initial curing.
Common sealing materials are described in the following Clauses. Forms left in
place serve to inhibit loss of moisture from surfaces in contact with the forms.
(1) Plastic Film
Plastic film is light in weight and can be applied as soon as free water has
disappeared from the surface. It is available in different thickness and weights,
and in clear, white, or black sheets. However, for curing concrete the film should
meet the requirements of ASTM C 171, which specifies a 50 microns thickness.
Care must be taken not to tear or otherwise interrupt the continuity of the film
curing. Plastic film reinforced with glass fibres is more durable and is less Iikely
to be torn than the non-reinforced type.
Architectural or coloured concrete that is subject to critical scrutiny should be
cured by other means because moisture condensing on the underside of the
smooth plastic film creates an uneven distribution of water in the concrete and
the migration of soluble substances that will usually result in a mottled
appearance. This may not be serious in pavements, roof slabs, and kerbs and
gutters, and may be prevented by occasional flooding under the film.
Combinations of plastic film bonded to absorbent fabric help to retain and
distribute the moisture released from the concrete and condensed on the curing
cover.
In its application, the plastic film shall be placed over the wet surface of the fresh
concrete as soon as possible without marring the surface, and shall cover all
exposed surfaces of the concrete. It shall be placed and weighted so that it
remains in contact with the concrete during the specified length of curing.
On flat surfaces such as pavements, the film should be extended beyond the
edges of the slab at least twice the thickness of the slab. Windrows of sand or
earth, or strips of wood can be placed along all edges and joints in the film to
retain moisture in the concrete and prevent wind from getting under the film and
removing it.
(2) Waterproof Paper
Waterproof paper should comply with ASTM C 171. It is composed of two sheets
of Kraft paper cemented together with a bituminous adhesive and reinforced with
fibre. Most paper sheets for curing have been treated to reduce the amount of
expansion and shrinkage when wetted and dried. The sheets can be cemented
together with bituminous cement as desired to meet width requirements.

92
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Paper sheets with one surface white to give reflectance and reduce absorption of
heat are available. A reflectance requirement is included in ASTM C 171 to
assure a useful degree of temperature control.
Waterproof paper is applied in the same manner as plastic film as above.
It is permissible to re-use waterproof paper as long as it retains moisture
efficiently. Tears are readily discernible and can be repaired with a patch of
paper cemented on with a waterproof glue or bituminous cement. Pin holes
resulting from walking on the paper, or from deterioration of the paper through
repeated use, are evident if the paper is held up to the light. When the condition
of the paper is questionable, additional use can be made of it by using it in
double thickness.
(3) Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds
Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete should comply with the
requirements of ASTM C 309.
Compounds consisting essentially of waxes, resins, chlorinated rubber and
solvents which are highly volatile at atmospheric temperatures are used
extensively for curing concrete. The formulation must be such as to provide a
seal shortly after being applied and must not be injurious to Portland cement
paste.
White or grey pigments are sometimes added to the compound to provide
reflectance of the sunrays, and to make the compound visible on the structure for
inspection purposes.
Curing compounds should not be used on surfaces that are to receive additional
concrete, paint or tile that requires a positive bond, unless it has been
demonstrated that the membrane can be satisfactorily removed before the
subsequent application is made, or that the membrane can serve satisfactorily as
a base for the application.
The compound should be applied at a uniform rate sufficient to comply with the
requirement of the test for water retention (ASTM C 156). The usual values for
coverage range from 3.5 to 5.0 I/m2.
It can be applied by hand spray or a mechanical application distributor, usually at
a pressure of 5 to 7 bar.
If the job size warrants, mechanical application is preferred because of speed
and uniformity of distribution. For very small areas such as patches it can be
brushed on with a wide, soft-bristled brush.
Liquid membrane-forming compounds generally must be applied at the time that
the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is seen, but
not so late that the liquid curing compound will be absorbed into the surface
pores of the concrete.
However, under certain adverse weather conditions which could result in the
formation of plastic shrinkage cracking in the fresh concrete, application of the
liquid curing compound immediately after the final finishing operation and before
the free water on the surface has completely disappeared may be necessary to
prevent the formation of cracks.
On formed concrete surfaces the curing compound is applied immediately upon
removal of the forms. If there is any drying or appreciable loss of moisture the
surface shall be sprayed with water and allowed to reach a uniformly damp
appearance with no free water on the surface when the compound is applied.
Pigmented compounds should be stirred to assure even distribution of the
pigment during application, unless the formulation contains a thixotropic agent to
prevent settlement .
93
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

7 05 01 03

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Moisture Loss
Moisture loss from surfaces placed against wooden forms or metal forms
exposed to heating by the sun should be minimized by keeping the forms wet
until they can be safely removed.

7 05 01 04

Curing Time
If one of the curing procedures under item 7 05 7 02 is used initially, it may be
replaced by one of the other procedures of this Clause any time after the
concrete is one day old provided the concrete is not permitted to become surface
dry during the transition.

7 06

Protection

7 06 01

Mechanical Damage
Self-supporting structures should not be loaded in such a way as to overstress
the concrete.

7 07

Joints

7 07 01

Expansion Joints

7 07 01 01

Joints with Joint Sealant


At expansion joints in concrete slabs to be exposed, expansion joints where filler
is completely covered by base and shoe mould, and at other joints indicated to
receive joint sealant, premoulded expansion joint filler strips should be installed
at the proper level below the finished floor with a slightly tapered,
dressed-and-oiled wood strip temporarily secured to the top thereof to form a
groove not less than 20 mm deep.
The wood strip should be removed after the concrete has set. The groove, when
surface dry, should be cleaned of foreign matter, loose particles, and concrete
protrusions, then filled approximately flush with joint sealant so as to be slightly
concave after drying.

7 07 01 02

Joints with Compound


When slabs on grade are to receive resilient flooring and premoulded expansion
joint, filler is required between the slabs or between the slabs and vertical
surfaces, the filler strips should be installed at the proper level below the finished
floor with a slightly tapered, dressed-and-oiled wood strip temporarily secured to
the top thereof, to form a groove not less than 6.5 mm deep. The wood strip
should be removed after the concrete has set.

7 07 02

Contraction Joints

7 07 02 01

Control Joints in Walls


Control joints in cast in-situ walls are planes of weakness that permit differential
movements in the plane of the wall. In lightly reinforced walls, half of the
horizontal steel bars shall be cut at the joint. Care must be taken to cut alternate
bars precisely at the joint. Control joints in walls should be spaced not more than
about 6 m apart. In addition, control joints should be placed where abrupt
changes in thickness or height occur, and near corners, if possible, as close as
1.5 m.

7 07 02 02

Control Joints in Slabs on Grade


Concrete must be placed continuously so that each unit of operation will be
monolithic in construction.
Concrete could be placed in alternate checkerboard pattern terminating at
crack-control joints or may be placed in alternate paving lanes as limited by
94
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

expansion and construction joints and with contraction joints to provide panels of
size specified.
Joints not shown should be located at column centrelines and at intermediate
intervals so that each panel shall be not more than 60 square metres in area.
Panels should be approximately square with dimension of any one side not more
than 7.5 metres.
Forms should remain in place for at least 12 hours after concrete placement.
Where columns bear on thickened slabs or thickened edges, floor slab
construction, contraction or expansion joints should be offset from thickened
slabs or thickened edges.
One of the most economical methods is to saw a continuous straight slot in the
top of the slab (Fig. 8).

Fig. 8: Crack control joints


The spacing of control joints in slabs on grade depends on - slab thickness shrinkage potential of the concrete and - curing environment
Suggested joint spacing is given in the following table. Unless reliable data
indicate that more widely spaced joints are feasible, the intervals given in the
table should be used. The resulting panels should be approximately square.
Panels with excessive length-to-width ratio (more than 1.5 to 1) are likely to
crack.

95
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Table 10: Spacing of control joints in slab on grades.


Slab
Thickness

Maximum spacing* of joints


Slump more than 100 mm

mm
125
150
175
200
225
250

Slump less
than 100 mm
Maximum aggregate size
less than 16 mm more than 16 mm all sizes
3.00 m
3.30 m
4.00 m
3.60 m
4.00 m
5.50 m
4.20 m
5.50 m
6.50 m
4.80 m
6.00 m
7.20 m
5.40 m
7.00 m
8.20 m
6.00 m
7.50 m
9.00 m

* Given spacing also apply to the distance from control joints to parallel
isolation joints or to parallel construction joints. Other factors may call for different
spacing.

7 08

Embedded Items

7 08 01

Installation of Anchorage Items


(1) Slots
Dovetail slots may be installed vertically in the concrete spaced not more than
600 mm apart for anchoring stone or brick facing and may be installed
horizontally approximately 600 mm apart to anchor furring. Adequate slots or
inserts shall be provided for anchoring members at openings.
Slots and dowels should be provided for anchoring ends and tops of masonry
partitions abutting concrete. Where concrete columns to be faced with brick are
less than
400 mm wide, slots may be omitted; where such columns are formed 400 to 750
mm wide, one row of slots shall be installed; where columns are more than 750
mm wide, slots shall be installed not more than 600 mm apart on centres.
Dovetail anchor slots for anchoring brick facing may be omitted in spandrel
beams less than 400 mm in depth.
(2) Wire Inserts for Plaster Accessories
Where ribbed lath and metal furring are to be secured to the underside of
concrete joists, fastenings should be provided for each rib or furring strip at all
bearings.
If joists are more than 200 mm wide, two rows of fastenings should be used so
that the unsupported span will not exceed 700 mm.
(3) Inserts for Hangers
Inserts for hangers for piping and mechanical fixtures and their installation should
be as specified in the relevant Section.

96
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 03 Concrete

ODAC
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

7 09

Cleaning

7 09 01

Water Cleaning
Water cleaning methods include low-pressure washes, moderate to highpressure water blasting, and steam.
Low-pressure washing is the simplest, requiring only that water run gently down
the concrete surface for a day or two. The softened dirt then is flushed off with a
slightly higher pressure rinse. Stubborn areas can be scrubbed with a nonmetallic bristle brush and rinsed again. High-pressure water blasting is used
effectively by experienced operators. Steam cleaning must be performed by
skilled operators using special equipment. Water methods are the least harmful
to concrete, but are not without potential problems.

7 09 02

Chemical Cleaning
Chemical cleaning is usually done with water-based mixtures formulated for
specific materials such as brick, stone, and concrete. A small amount of acid or
alkali is included to separate the dirt from the surface. There can be problems
related to the use of chemical cleaners. Their acid or alkaline properties can lead
to reaction between cleaner and concrete. Since chemical cleaners are used in
the form of water-diluted solutions they too can liberate soluble salts within the
concrete. Chemical cleaners shall be used by skilled operators taking suitable
safety precautions.

7 09 03

Mechanical Cleaning
Mechanical cleaning includes abrasive blasting (sandblasting) and power
chipping and grinding. These methods wear the dirt off the surface rather than
separate it from the surface. They, in fact, wear away both the dirt and some of
the concrete surface, and it is inevitable that there will be loss of decorative
detail, increased surface roughness, and rounding of sharp corners. Abrasive
methods may also reveal defects hidden beneath the formed surface.

97
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

Вам также может понравиться